Maruti - Celerio - Owners Manual - 2017 - 2017

FOREWORD This manual is an essential part of your vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when resold or otherwise transferred to a new owner or operator. Please read this manual carefully before operating your new MARUTI SUZUKI and review the manual from time to time. It contains important information on safety, operation and maintenance. You are invited to avail the three Free Inspection Services as described in the manual. Three free inspection coupons are attached to this manual. Please show this manual to your dealer workshop while you take your MARUTI SUZUKI for any Service. To prolong the life of your vehicle and reduce maintenance cost, the periodic maintenance must be carried out according to “PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE” described in “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section of this manual. It is essential for preventing trouble and accidents to ensure your satisfaction and safety. Daily inspection and care as per “DAILY INSPECTION CHECKLIST” described in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section of this manual is essential for prolonging the life of the vehicle and for safe driving. Vehicle and the available features/accessories therein should be used and plied by the owner/user in accordance with the applicable legal requirements. MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED believes in conservation and protection of Earth’s natural resources. To that end, we encourage every vehicle owner to recycle, trade-in or properly dispose of, as appropriate, used Engine Oil, coolant and other fluids, batteries and tyres etc. MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED All information in this manual is based on the latest product information available at the time of publication. Due to improvements or other changes, there may be discrepancies between information in this manual and your vehicle. MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED reserves the right to make production changes at any time, without notice and without incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes to vehicles previously built or sold. This vehicle may not comply with standards or regulations of other countries. Before attempting to register this vehicle in any other country, check all applicable regulations and make any necessary modifications. IMPORTANT MODIFICATION WARNING WARNING/ CAUTION/NOTICE/ NOTE Please read this manual and follow its instructions carefully. To emphasize special information, the symbol and the words WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and NOTE have special meanings. Pay particular attention to messages highlighted by these signal words: WARNING Do not modify your vehicle. Modification could adversely affect safety, handling, performance, or durability and may violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification shall not be covered under warranty. WARNING Indicates a potential hazard that could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION Indicates a potential hazard that could result in minor or moderate injury. NOTICE Indicates a potential hazard that could result in vehicle damage. NOTE: Indicates special information to make maintenance easier or instructions clearer. 75F135 The circle with a slash in this manual means “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this happen”. NOTE: • Words like car, model/variant are invariably used in this manual to denote the “Vehicle”. • Pictorial representations used in this manual are for reference purposes only. NOTICE Improper installation of mobile communication equipment such as cellular telephones, CB (Citizen’s Band) radios may cause electronic interference with your vehicle’s ignition system, resulting in vehicle performance problems. Consult your Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop or qualified service technician for advice on installing such mobile communication equipment. NOTICE The diagnostic connector of your vehicle is prepared only for the specific diagnostic tool for inspection and service purpose. Connecting any other tool or device may interfere with electronic parts operations and cause running out of batteries. “WARNING” Vehicle may break-down, meet with an accident or catch fire due to 1. Installation of - High wattage bulbs - Non genuine lamps / horns - Modified suspension / wheels - Non genuine parts / accessories etc. 2. Retrofitment of LPG / CNG fuel systems/kits. 3. Usage of domestic LPG. 4. Short circuiting due to tampering of wiring harness. CAUTION: DO NOT STORE OR CARRY INFLAMMABLE MATERIALS IN THE VEHICLE. Avoid driving into or starting the vehicle in a heavily water logged area. Vehicle may breakdown or engine may fail due to 1. Water entry into the engine (which may lead to hydrostatic lock). 2. Short circuiting of the electrical systems. If the vehicle is stuck in deep water, do not start / crank the vehicle until the level of water drops below the level of exhaust pipe. NOTE: IF THE VEHICLE IS SUBMERGED IN WATER, REPORT AUTHORIZED WORKSHOP. TO THE NEAREST “CAUTION” 1. Retro-fitment of LPG / CNG kit may deteriorate vehicle performance, reduce engine & engine related component’s life and also warranty will be null and void for such vehicles. 2. Do not use domestic LPG/LPG cylinder for your factory fitted LPG vehicles. 3. Usage of domestic LPG for running vehicles is prohibited as per law. 4. Do not remove company fitted LPG/CNG kit to install some other kit. It may affect vehicle performance and may cause fire. 5. Drive slowly on wet roads. Tires may slip while braking at higher speeds due to aquaplaning.(reduced contact area between tire and road due to presence of water) 6. Do not leave engine running in garages or confined areas, with passengers inside. This may result in accumulation of carbonmonoxide in cabin and may lead to suffocation or breathing problems. 7. Do not park vehicle on dry leaves or grass. This may lead to fire due to hot catalytic converter, igniting the dry leaves/grass. 8. If the vehicle is equipped with CNG/LPG, ensure availability of fire extinguisher in the vehicle all the time. 9. Always wear seat belt at all the times. 10. Do not use mobile phone while driving. 11. Avoid Smoking in the car, live bud thrown in car may cause fire. 12. Do not put any body part under the vehicle when it is supported on a Jack. 13. Do not use non-genuine accessories in your vehicle. 14. Do not fit accessories from unauthorized workshops/sources. 15. Usage of non-approved electrical accessories in your vehicle may result in spark, fire or personal injury. 16. Do not use camphor, incense sticks inside cabin room. Doing so may cause fire. 17. Avoid usage of cellular phones while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors and cause fire. 18. Avoid entry inside vehicle immediately once after you have begun refueling. You can generate a build up of static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fabric capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors and may causing a fire. 19. Do not check the engine room / open the hood near the fire area (Outside the vehicle). Fuel, washer fluid, etc. are flammable oils that may cause fire. 20. Avoid driving when vehicle has met with an accident . Before driving, Please contact with authorized MSIL dealership. VIN: MODEL: OWNER NAME & ADDRESS VARIANT: COLOUR: ENGINE NO.: CONTACT NO. KEY NO.: E-mail ID: INVOICE DATE: ODOMETER READING KM REGISTRATION NO.: SELLING DEALER NAME & CODE BATTERY MAKE: DEALER SHOWROOM ADDRESS & CONTACT NO. (STAMP) BATTERY NO.: BATTERY BATCH TYRE MAKE BATCH CODE Front Right Front Left Rear Right CONTACT NO. FOR SERVICE APPOINTMENT & SUPPORT Rear Left Spare For any assistance with regard to our product, please contact General Manager/Works Manager at any of our Dealer or Authorised workshop. For additional enquiry, you may contact our Regional Office or Service Department. The addresses and phone numbers are given in Service Network section of this Manual. CUSTOMER SERVICE MAINTENANCE RECORD (to be filled by customer) INSPECTION SCHEDULE DATE OF SERVICE MILEAGE (KM) 1st Free inspection service - 1000 KM / 1 Months 2nd Free inspection service - 5000 KM / 6 Months 3rd Free inspection service - 10000 KM / 12 Months 1st Paid inspection service - 20000 KM / 24 Months 2nd Paid inspection service - 30000 KM / 36 Months 3rd Paid inspection service - 40000 KM / 48 Months 4th Paid inspection service - 50000 KM / 60 Months 5th Paid inspection service - 60000 KM / 72 Months 6th Paid inspection service - 70000 KM / 84 Months 7th Paid inspection service - 80000 KM / 96 Months 8th Paid inspection service - 90000 KM / 108 Months 9th Paid inspection service - 100000 KM / 120 Months 10th Paid inspection service - 110000 KM / 132 Months 11th Paid inspection service - 120000 KM / 144 Months 12th Paid inspection service - 130000 KM / 156 Months Maruti Suzuki Network can be viewed by installing below Mobile Apps: Maruti Suzuki Rewards app ensures a hassle free car ownership experience. Get easy access to all the services and information you need by downloading the app NAME OF SERVICING WORKSHOP 1ST. FREE INSPECTION COUPON 1ST. FREE INSPECTION COUPON 1ST. FREE INSPECTION COUPON (Customer’s copy) (Selling dealer copy) (Servicing W/S copy) (1,000 KM or 1 MONTH) (1,000 KM or 1 MONTH) Model Name Model Name Model Name Model Code* Model Code* Model Code* VIN VIN VIN Engine No. Engine No. Engine No. Mileage Mileage Mileage (1,000 KM or 1 MONTH) Invoice Date D D M M Y Y Invoice Date D D M M Y Y Invoice Date D D M M Y Y Date of Inspection D D M M Y Y Date of Inspection D D M M Y Y Date of Inspection D D M M Y Y Registration No. Registration No. Registration No. Customer Name Customer Name Customer Name Ph. No. Ph. No. Ph. No. Service workshop / MASS Code (fill below) — — COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER Workshop In charge Signature For periodic maintenance schedule, refer to “Inspection and Maintenance” section of this manual Service workshop / MASS Code (fill below) — — COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER Workshop In charge Signature Service workshop / MASS Code (fill below) — — COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER Workshop In charge Signature 1ST. FREE INSPECTION COUPON 1ST. FREE INSPECTION COUPON 1ST. FREE INSPECTION COUPON (Servicing W/S copy) (Selling dealer copy) (Customer’s copy) (1,000 KM or 1 MONTH) Stamp of Selling dealer (Code & Full Address) For Servicing Workshop 1. Please Fill up Model codes correctly. 2. Please fill up Complete VIN. 3. Please fill up customer name and Phone No. details legibly and correctly for the latest owner. 4. Free service coupon of selling dealer not operational at present, should be sent to MSIL on monthly basis. FOR BAR CODE Service Division Maruti Suzuki India Limited (1,000 KM or 1 MONTH) Stamp of Selling dealer (Code & Full Address) For Servicing Workshop 1. Please Fill up Model codes correctly. 2. Please fill up Complete VIN. 3. Please fill up customer name and Phone No. details legibly and correctly for the latest owner. 4. Free service coupon of selling dealer not operational at present, should be sent to MSIL on monthly basis. FOR BAR CODE Service Division Maruti Suzuki India Limited (1,000 KM or 1 MONTH) Stamp of Selling dealer (Code & Full Address) For Servicing Workshop 1. Please Fill up Model codes correctly. 2. Please fill up Complete VIN. 3. Please fill up customer name and Phone No. details legibly and correctly for the latest owner. 4. Free service coupon of selling dealer not operational at present, should be sent to MSIL on monthly basis. FOR BAR CODE Service Division Maruti Suzuki India Limited 2ND. FREE INSPECTION COUPON 2ND. FREE INSPECTION COUPON 2ND. FREE INSPECTION COUPON (Customer’s copy) (Selling dealer copy) (Servicing W/S copy (5,000 KM or 6 MONTHS) (5,000 KM or 6 MONTHS) Model Name Model Name Model Name Model Code* Model Code* Model Code* VIN VIN VIN Engine No. Engine No. Engine No. Mileage Mileage Mileage (5,000 KM or 6 MONTHS) Invoice Date D D M M Y Y Invoice Date D D M M Y Y Invoice Date D D M M Y Y Date of Inspection D D M M Y Y Date of Inspection D D M M Y Y Date of Inspection D D M M Y Y Registration No. Registration No. Registration No. Customer Name Customer Name Customer Name Ph. No. Ph. No. Ph. No. Service workshop / MASS Code (fill below) — — COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER Workshop In charge Signature For periodic maintenance schedule, refer to “Inspection and Maintenance” section of this manual Service workshop / MASS Code (fill below) — — COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER Workshop In charge Signature Service workshop / MASS Code (fill below) — — COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER Workshop In charge Signature 2ND. FREE INSPECTION COUPON 2ND. FREE INSPECTION COUPON 2ND. FREE INSPECTION COUPON (Servicing W/S copy) (Selling dealer copy) (Customer’s copy) (5,000 KM or 6 MONTHS) Stamp of Selling dealer (Code & Full Address) For Servicing Workshop 1. Please Fill up Model codes correctly. 2. Please fill up Complete VIN. 3. Please fill up customer name and Phone No. details legibly and correctly for the latest owner. 4. Free service coupon of selling dealer not operational at present, should be sent to MSIL on monthly basis. FOR BAR CODE Service Division Maruti Suzuki India Limited (5,000 KM or 6 MONTHS) Stamp of Selling dealer (Code & Full Address) For Servicing Workshop 1. Please Fill up Model codes correctly. 2. Please fill up Complete VIN. 3. Please fill up customer name and Phone No. details legibly and correctly for the latest owner. 4. Free service coupon of selling dealer not operational at present, should be sent to MSIL on monthly basis. FOR BAR CODE Service Division Maruti Suzuki India Limited (5,000 KM or 6 MONTHS) Stamp of Selling dealer (Code & Full Address) For Servicing Workshop 1. Please Fill up Model codes correctly. 2. Please fill up Complete VIN. 3. Please fill up customer name and Phone No. details legibly and correctly for the latest owner. 4. Free service coupon of selling dealer not operational at present, should be sent to MSIL on monthly basis. FOR BAR CODE Service Division Maruti Suzuki India Limited 3RD. FREE INSPECTION COUPON 3RD. FREE INSPECTION COUPON 3RD. FREE INSPECTION COUPON (Customer’s copy) (Selling dealer copy) (Servicing W/S copy) (10,000 KM or 12 MONTHS) (10,000 KM or 12 MONTHS) Model Name Model Name Model Name Model Code* Model Code* Model Code* VIN VIN VIN Engine No. Engine No. Engine No. Mileage Mileage Mileage (10,000 KM or 12 MONTHS) Invoice Date D D M M Y Y Invoice Date D D M M Y Y Invoice Date D D M M Y Y Date of Inspection D D M M Y Y Date of Inspection D D M M Y Y Date of Inspection D D M M Y Y Registration No. Registration No. Registration No. Customer Name Customer Name Customer Name Ph. No. Ph. No. Ph. No. Service workshop / MASS Code (fill below) — — COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER Workshop In charge Signature For periodic maintenance schedule, refer to “Inspection and Maintenance” section of this manual Service workshop / MASS Code (fill below) — — COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER Workshop In charge Signature Service workshop / MASS Code (fill below) — — COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER Workshop In charge Signature 3RD. FREE INSPECTION COUPON 3RD. FREE INSPECTION COUPON 3RD. FREE INSPECTION COUPON (Servicing W/S copy) (Selling dealer copy) (Customer’s copy) (10,000 KM or 12 MONTHS) Stamp of Selling dealer (Code & Full Address) For Servicing Workshop 1. Please Fill up Model codes correctly. 2. Please fill up Complete VIN. 3. Please fill up customer name and Phone No. details legibly and correctly for the latest owner. 4. Free service coupon of selling dealer not operational at present, should be sent to MSIL on monthly basis. FOR BAR CODE Service Division Maruti Suzuki India Limited (10,000 KM or 12 MONTHS) Stamp of Selling dealer (Code & Full Address) For Servicing Workshop 1. Please Fill up Model codes correctly. 2. Please fill up Complete VIN. 3. Please fill up customer name and Phone No. details legibly and correctly for the latest owner. 4. Free service coupon of selling dealer not operational at present, should be sent to MSIL on monthly basis. FOR BAR CODE Service Division Maruti Suzuki India Limited (10,000 KM or 12 MONTHS) Stamp of Selling dealer (Code & Full Address) For Servicing Workshop 1. Please Fill up Model codes correctly. 2. Please fill up Complete VIN. 3. Please fill up customer name and Phone No. details legibly and correctly for the latest owner. 4. Free service coupon of selling dealer not operational at present, should be sent to MSIL on monthly basis. FOR BAR CODE Service Division Maruti Suzuki India Limited WARRANTY POLICY (4) Limitation: Maruti Suzuki India Limited (hereinafter called “Maruti Suzuki”), warrants that each new Maruti Suzuki vehicle distributed in India by Maruti Suzuki and sold by a Maruti Suzuki authorised dealer will be free, under normal use and service, from any defects in material and workmanship at the time of manufacture SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS: This warranty shall not apply to: (1) Qualification: To qualify for this warranty the vehicle must be delivered by a Maruti Suzuki authorised dealer and set-up, and serviced by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. (2) Term: The term of the warranty shall be twenty-four (24) months or 40,000 kilometers (whichever occurs first) from the date of invoice to the first owner. (3) Maruti Suzuki Warranty Obligation: If any defect(s) should be found in a Maruti Suzuki vehicle within the term stipulated above, Maruti Suzuki’s only obligation is to repair or replace at its sole discretion any part shown to be defective, with a new part or the equivalent at no cost to the owner for parts or labour, when Maruti Suzuki acknowledges that such a defect is attributable to faulty material or workmanship at the time of manufacture. Such defective parts, which have been replaced, will become the property of Maruti Suzuki. The owner is responsible for any repair or replacements which are not covered by this warranty. The decision of Maruti Suzuki shall be final & binding. (a) Normal maintenance service required other than the three free services, including without limitation, oil and fluid changes, Consumables, headlight aiming, fastener retightening, wheel balancing, wheel alignment and tyre rotation, cleaning of injectors, adjustments of clutch and valve clearance. (b) The normal wear of parts including without limitation, bulbs, tyres* and tubes, spark plugs, belts, hoses, filters, wiper blades, brushes, contact points, fuses, clutch disc, brake shoes, brake pads, cable and all rubber parts (except oil seal and glass run). (c) Any vehicle which has been used for competition, rallies or racing. (d) Any repairs or replacement arising from accidents or collision. (e) Any defect/ damage caused by misuse, negligence, abnormal use, insufficient care, vandalism, theft, riot, fire, flooding not limited to entry of water in the components resulting in engine seizure, hydrostatic lock, etc. or external damages to the body/ components. (f) Any damage resulting due to usage of adulterated fuel/ lubricants/ oil/ coolant/ fluids/ polishing products and fuel/ lubricants/ oil/ coolant/ fluids used other than those specified in the Owner’s Manual. (g) Any vehicle which has been modified or altered, including without limitation, the installation of performance accessories, enlargements of lights, other changes and external/ consequential reasons. (h) Any vehicle on which parts or accessories not approved by Maruti Suzuki (Non-MSGA, Non-MSGP) have been used. (* - If there is a complaint related to tyre, the customer may contact respective tyre manufacturer.) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r) (s) (t) (u) (v) (w) Any vehicle which has not been operated in accordance with the operating instructions in this Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet. Any vehicle which has not received the service inspections prescribed in this Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet. Any vehicle which has been assembled, disassembled, adjusted or repaired by other than a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. Any vehicle which has been used for purposes other than what it was designed for. Any damage or deterioration caused by airborne fallout, industrial fallout, acid rain, hail or hail storm, wind storm, lightning, bird droppings, rodents bite / rat bite and such other thing that result in damage to the vehicle. Insignificant defects / noise which do not affect the function of the vehicle including without limitation, sound, vibration and fluid seep. Any natural wear and tear including without limitation, ageing, wear & tear or deterioration such as discoloration, fading, deformation or blurring and fabric discoloration. Installation and usage of domestic LPG gas/LPG Cylinder. V-belts, hoses and gas leaks. Any vehicle retrofitted with LPG/CNG kits. Repainting including patchwork, bodywork and mouldings and interior trims. Corrosion, rusting of body parts and/ or components. Any vehicle on which odometer has been changed unauthorisedly or odometer reading has been modified/ tampered with/ or not matching the service records. The damage(s) caused to the vehicle being unattended despite knowledge that the defect exists and ignorance by the owner/ user of the vehicle. Any damage(s) caused to vehicle including battery/ tyre due to parking of the vehicle in idle condition for long duration of time periods. (x) Any vehicle on which the retro-fitment is not authorized and/ or type approved as per the standards prescribed by the relevant authority including but not limited to Automotive Standards of India. (y) Any vehicle on which the retro-fitment is such which directly or indirectly causes any damage to the vehicle or affects the functions of the vehicle in any manner whatsoever. (5) Extent of Warranty: This warranty is the entire written warranty given by Maruti Suzuki for Maruti Suzuki vehicles and no dealer or its or his agent or employee is authorised to extend or enlarge this warranty and no dealer or its or his agent or employee is authorised to make any oral warranty or representation or assurance on behalf of Maruti Suzuki. Maruti Suzuki reserves the right to add any improvements or change the design of any model at any time with no obligation to make the same changes on units previously sold. (6) Warranty Service: To obtain warranty service, the complete vehicle must be presented at the owner’s expenses to Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. The customer shall be responsible for his belongings or accessories fitted in the vehicle at the time of presenting the vehicle for service and no claim shall be entertained in any manner under any circumstances. (7) Owner’s Warranty Obligations: NOTICE The owner shall not use the vehicle in a damaged condition and report the same immediately to the nearest Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop. This would result in early inspection and repair of the vehicle and any possible harm to the person or aggravation of damage to the vehicle can be prevented. It is responsibility of each owner to: – Have performed, at his own expenses, by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop all the service inspections specified in the Maruti Suzuki “Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet” and maintain adequate proof that such service inspections have been performed. – Update and maintain the 'Customer service maintenance records' page in the “Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet”, whenever service inspection or warranty service is carried out on the vehicle in a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. – Present the Maruti Suzuki “Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet” to the Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop whenever requesting service inspections or warranty service. If the “Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet” should be lost or destroyed the owner should consult the Maruti Suzuki authorised dealer from whom the vehicle was purchased for instructions concerning replacement of the “Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet”. (8) Disclaimer of Consequential Damage: Maruti Suzuki assumes no responsibility for loss of vehicle, loss of time, inconvenience or any other indirect incidental or consequential damage resulting from the vehicle not being available to the owner because of any defect covered by this warranty. (9) Change of Owner Even if ownership of the vehicle changes, the remaining warranty period is effective for the new owner. This warranty is applicable only in India and not transferable to any other country. NOTE: Notwithstanding the warranty obligations, Maruti Suzuki may reuse reworked (refurbished) parts for undertaking rectification of recalled vehicles in terms of applicable laws. EMISSION WARRANTY POLICY Maruti Suzuki offers the Emission Warranty on all Maruti Suzuki vehicles (apart from the Regular Warranty and will run parallel to the regular product warranty) only in four metropolitan cities (New Delhi, Kolkata, Mumbai and Chennai) with effect from July 1st, 2001. Terms: The Emission Warranty will be applicable for 80,000 kms or 3 years (Whichever comes earlier) from the date of invoice to the first owner. The remaining warranty terms will be valid in case of any change in ownership provided the production of all valid documents. Conditions: 1. Under Emission Warranty, Warranty claims will be admitted for a prima-facie examination, in case vehicle fails to meet the Emission Standard as specified in sub rule (2) of rule no. 115 of Central Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR), 1989. 2. The warranty claims will only be accepted after examination carried out by Maruti Suzuki or Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop which leads to firm conclusions that the a) Original settings have not been tampered in any case. b) Part (as given in Annexure - A) has a manufacturing defect. c) Vehicle is unable to meet the Emission Standards (as given in 1.), inspite of the vehicle having been maintained and used in accordance with the instructions as specified in Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet and the used fuel and different oils (Engine oil, Transmission oil, Brake oil etc.) are also as per specification. 3. The method of examination for deciding the warranty of the parts will be at the sole discretion of Maruti Suzuki and Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop and results of the examination will be final and binding. If after examination, the warrantable condition is not established, Maruti Suzuki and Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop has the right to charge all, or part of the cost of such examination. 4. Under Emission Warranty, the parts (as given in Annexure - A) will be changed free of cost, but the consumables will be charged as per actual. 5. If the part covered under Emission Warranty or the associated parts, are not independently replaceable, on account of these being integral parts of a complete assembly, Maruti Suzuki and Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop will have the sole discretion to replace either the entire assembly or by using some of the parts of the system through suitable repairs or modifications. 6. Any consequential repairs or replacement of parts which may be found necessary to establish compliance of Emission Warranty, will not be considered under warranty, unless the same is under product warranty. The consumable will be charged as per actual under such repair or replacement. 7. Maruti Suzuki will not be responsible for the cost of transportation of the vehicle to the nearest Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop or any loss due to non-availability of the vehicle during the period of lodging of a warranty claim and examination and/or repair by Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. 8. Maruti Suzuki will not be responsible for any penalty that may be charged by statutory authorities on account of failure to comply with the EMISSION STANDARDS. 9. Emission Warranty will not be affected by the change of owner, provided all the documents are available. 10. All maintenance actions (as specified in the Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet) need to be followed and recorded in the manual for emission warranty. 11. The customer needs to produce the PUC (Pollution Under Control) certificate valid for the period preceding the test during which the failure is discovered. The receipts (for the maintenance of the vehicle as per specification in Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet from the date of original purchase of the vehicle) will also be required. Conditions under which the Emission Warranty is not APPLICABLE 1. In the absence of valid PUC certificate. 2. Vehicle not serviced from Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop as per the schedule specified in the Owner’s Manual. 3. Vehicle subjected to abnormal use (accident, motor race, rallies or for the purpose of establishing the records etc). 4. Use of non MSGP (Maruti Suzuki Genuine Part). 5. Vehicle that has been tampered with. 6. Tampering with odometer so that the actual kilometer reading cannot be determined. 7. Use of adulterated fuel and/or unspecified oils (Engine oil, Transmission oil and Brake oil etc). Annexure - A List of parts (if applicable) covered under Emission Warranty 1. Fuel Injection Assembly, Pressure Regulator, Throttle Body Assembly. 2. Electronic Control Module (ECM). 3. Intake Manifold. 4. EGR valve. 5. Ignition Coil. 6. Canister Assembly. 7. Vapour Liquid Seperator. 8. Fuel Tank and Filler Cap. 9. PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) Valve. 10. Oil Filler Cap. 11. Catalytic Convertor. 12. Exhaust Manifold. 13. All Fuel Injection System related Sensors. 14. High Pressure Fuel Pump. 15. Glow Plug. 16. Glow Plug Controller. TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR SAFE DRIVING 1 BEFORE DRIVING 2 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 3 DRIVING TIPS 4 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 5 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 6 EMERGENCY SERVICE 7 APPEARANCE CARE 8 SPECIFICATIONS 9 SERVICE NETWORK 10 69RH0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING FOR SAFE DRIVING 1 Floor mats (if equipped) ..................................................... 1-1 Front seats ........................................................................... 1-1 Rear seats ............................................................................ 1-2 Seat belts and child restraint systems .............................. 1-4 Supplemental restraint system (airbags) .......................... 1-18 Exhaust gas warning .......................................................... 1-26 52D078S 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING Floor mats (if equipped) WARNING EXAMPLE Failure to take the following precautions may result in the driver’s side floor mat interfering with the pedals and causing a loss of vehicle control or an accident. • Check that the floor mat grommets are hooked to the fasteners. • Never use a floor mat which does not fit the floor contours. • Never stack floor mats. 72M10201 To prevent the driver’s side floor mat from sliding forward and possibly interfering with the operation of the pedals, MARUTI SUZUKI genuine floor mats are recommended. Whenever you put the driver’s side floor mat back in the vehicle after it has been removed, hook the floor mat grommets to the fasteners and position the floor mat properly in the footwell. When you replace the floor mats in your vehicle with a different type such as allweather floor mats, we highly recommend to use MARUTI SUZUKI genuine floor mats for proper fitting. Front seats Precaution for front passenger seat For seat with seat belt reminder, refer to the NOTICE in the “Front passenger’s seat belt reminder” section. Seat adjustment WARNING • Never attempt to adjust the driver’s seat or seatback while driving. The seat or seatback could move unexpectedly, causing loss of control. Check that the driver’s seat and seatback are properly adjusted before you start driving. • To avoid excessive seat belt slack, which reduces the effectiveness of the seat belts as a safety device, check that the seats are adjusted before the seat belts are fastened. • All seatbacks should always be in an upright position when driving, or seat belt effectiveness may be reduced. Seat belts are designed to offer maximum protection when seatbacks are in the upright position. (Continued) 1-1 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING EXAMPLE WARNING (Continued) • Do not leave cigarette lighters or spray cans on the floor. If a cigarette lighter or spray can is on the floor, it may light accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire. Rear seats Folding rear seats CAUTION Do not place any object under the front seat. If an object gets stuck under the front seat, the seat shall not be latched properly and may cause injury. NOTE: To operate the seat back smoothly, pull the seat back adjustment lever (2) in upward direction. Ensure to move seat back only after lever is moved to fully up position. After adjustment of seat back, release the lever gently. Check that seat back is locked by moving it forward and backward. The rear seat(s) of your vehicle can be folded forward to provide additional cargo space. To fold the rear seat(s) forward: (2) (3) (1) EXAMPLE 81RM01001 Seat position adjustment lever (1) Pull the lever up and slide the seat. Seatback angle adjustment lever (2) Pull the lever up and move the seatback. Seat height adjustment lever (3) (if equipped) Pull the lever up to raise the seat. Push the lever down to lower the seat. After adjustment, move the seat and seatback forward and backward to check that it is securely latched. 81RM01002 1) Hook the webbing of the outboard lapshoulder belts in the belt hangers. 1-2 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING To return the seat to the normal position, follow the procedure below. EXAMPLE EXAMPLE CAUTION When returning the rear seatback to the normal position, be careful that your finger is not caught between the lock and the striker. NOTICE 66RH027 2) Pull the release knob(s) on the top of the seat(s), and fold the seatback forward. NOTICE After folding the rear seatback forward, do not allow any foreign material to enter the lock opening. This may cause damage to the inside of the lock and prevent the seatback from being locked securely. • When returning the rear seatback to the normal position, check that there is nothing around the striker. Any foreign materials prevent the seatback from being locked securely. • When you move a seatback, make sure the belt webbing is hooked in the seat belt hangers so the seat belts are not caught by the seatback, seat hinge, or seat latch. This helps prevent damage to the belt system. • Make sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 69RH039 Raise the seatback until it locks into place. After returning the seat, move the seatback forward and backward to check that it is securely latched. CAUTION Do not put your hand into the rear seatback lock opening, or your finger may get caught and be injured. WARNING If you need to carry cargo in the passenger compartment with the rear seatback folded forward, secure the cargo or it may be thrown about, causing injury. Never pile cargo higher than the seatbacks. 1-3 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING NOTICE • When returning the rear seatback to the normal position, do not allow any foreign material to enter the lock opening. This may prevent the seatback from being locked securely. • When returning the rear seatback to the normal position, handle it carefully by hand to avoid any damage to the lock itself. Do not push it by using some material or by applying excessive force. • As the lock is designed exclusively for securing the rear seatback, do not use it for any other purpose. Incorrect use of it may cause damage to the inside of the lock and prevent the seatback from being locked securely. Seat belts and child restraint systems EXAMPLE 52D078S WARNING WARNING (Continued) • Do not modify, remove, disassemble seat belts. Doing so may prevent them from functioning properly and cause the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a collision. • Never allow persons to ride in the cargo area of a vehicle. In the event of an accident, there is a much greater risk of injury for persons who are not riding in a seat with their seat belt securely fastened. • Ensure that all seat belts are worn correctly. An improperly worn seat belt increases the risk of injury or death if a collision occurs. • Wear your seat belts at all times. • An airbag supplements or adds to the frontal collision protection offered by seat belts. The driver and all passengers must be properly restrained by wearing seat belts at all times even if driving for a very short distance, whether or not an airbag is mounted at their seating position, to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a collision. (Continued) 1-4 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING EXAMPLE Above the pelvis EXAMPLE Across the pelvis 65D606 WARNING • Seat belts should always be adjusted as follows: – the lap portion of the belt should be worn low across the pelvis, not across the waist. – the shoulder straps should be worn on the outside shoulder only, and never under the arm. – the shoulder straps should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. (Continued) EXAMPLE as low as possible across the hips 65D201A WARNING (Continued) • Seat belts should never be worn with the straps twisted and should be adjusted as tightly as is comfortable to provide the protection for which they have been designed. A slack belt will provide less protection than a snug belt. • Check that seat belt latch plate (tongue) is inserted into the proper buckle especially in the rear seats. It is not possible to insert into the wrong buckles in the rear seats. (Continued) 65D199A WARNING (Continued) • Pregnant women should use seat belts, although specific recommendations about driving should be made by the woman’s medical advisor. Remember that the lap portion of the belt should be worn as low as possible across the hips, as shown in the illustration. • Do not wear seat belts over hard, fragile, or sharp items such as pens, keys, eyeglasses, etc. in pockets or on clothing. The pressure from seat belt on such items can cause injury in case of an accident. (Continued) 1-5 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING WARNING (Continued) • Never use the same seat belt for more than one occupant and never attach a seat belt over an infant or child being held on an occupant’s lap. Such seat belt use could cause serious injury in the event of an accident. • Periodically inspect seat belt assemblies for excessive wear and damage. Seat belts should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged in any way. It is essential to replace the entire seat belt assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact, even if damage to the assembly is not obvious. • Children aged 12 and under should ride properly restrained in the rear seat. • Infants and small children should never be transported unless they are properly restrained. Restraint systems for infants and small children can be purchased locally and should be used. Check that the system you purchase meets applicable safety standards. Read and follow all the directions provided by the manufacturer. (Continued) WARNING (Continued) • For child, if the seat belt irritates the neck or face, use a child restraint system appropriately for the child. The seat belts of your vehicle are principally designed for persons of adult size. • Avoid contamination of seat belt webbing by polishes, oils, chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water. • Do not insert any items such as coins and clips into the seat belt buckles and be careful not to spill liquids into these parts. If foreign materials get into a seat belt buckle, the seat belt may not work properly. • All seatbacks should always be in an upright position when driving, or seat belt effectiveness may be reduced. Seat belts are designed to offer maximum protection when seatbacks are in the upright position. Lap-shoulder belt Emergency locking retractor (ELR) The seat belt has an emergency locking retractor (ELR), which is designed to lock the seat belt only during a sudden stop or impact. It also may lock if you pull the belt across your body very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back to unlock it, and then pull the belt across your body more slowly. Safety reminder Sit up straight and fully back Low on hips EXAMPLE 60A038A 1-6 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING EXAMPLE Low on hips All seat belts except rear center All seat belts except rear center are the lap-shoulder belt. EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 60A040 To reduce the risk of sliding under the belt during a collision, position the lap portion of the belt across your lap as low on your hips as possible and adjust it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion of the belt upward through the latch plate. The length of the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itself to allow freedom of movement. 69RM010023 60A036 To fasten the seat belt, sit up straight and far back into the seat, pull the latch plate attached to the seat belt across your body and press it straight into the buckle until you hear a click. NOTE: The word “CENTER” is marked on the buckle and latch plate for the rear center belt. The buckles are designed so a latch plate cannot be inserted into the wrong buckle. NOTE: If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor 1-7 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING Lap belt EXAMPLE Rear center seat belt Sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten the belt, pull the latch plate attached to the seat belt across your hips and press it straight into the buckle until you hear a click. To reduce the risk of sliding under the belt during a collision, position the belt across your lap as low on your hips as possible and adjust it to a snug fit. TO TIGHTEN EXAMPLE 60A039 To unfasten the seat belt, push the red “PRESS” button on the buckle and retract the belt slowly while holding the belt or/and the latch plate. EXAMPLE TO LOOSEN Right angle 80JS029 Low on hips To lengthen, release the latch plate from the buckle, pull the latch plate (adjuster) in the direction of the arrow, at right angles to the belt. The latch plate should then be refitted into the buckle and the belt tightened as previously described. To unfasten the belt, press the release button on the buckle catch. 80JS028 To tighten the belt, pull the free end of the belt across alongside the lap strap. 1-8 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING Seat belt reminder With tachometer EXAMPLE (1) When the driver and/or front passenger do(does) not fasten their seat belts, the seat belt reminder lights will come on or blink and a buzzer will sound to remind the driver and/or passenger to fasten their seat belts. For more details, refer to the explanation below. WARNING EXAMPLE 69RM01003 NOTE: The word “CENTER” is marked on the buckle and latch plate for the rear center belt. The buckles are designed so a latch plate cannot be inserted into the wrong buckle. 81RM01003 Without tachometer It is absolutely essential that the driver and passengers fasten their seat belts at all times. Persons who are not fastening seat belts have a much greater risk of injury if an accident occurs. Make a regular habit of buckling your seat belt before putting the key in the ignition switch. NOTE: The driver’s seat belt reminder light / front passenger’s seat belt reminder light is for both the driver and front passenger. EXAMPLE (1) 81RM01004 (1) Driver’s seat belt reminder light / front passenger’s seat belt reminder light 1-9 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING Driver’s seat belt reminder If the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled when the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position, the reminder works as follows: 1) The driver’s seat belt reminder light will come on. 2) After the vehicle’s speed has reached about 15 km/h, the driver’s seat belt reminder light will blink and a buzzer will sound for about 95 seconds. 3) The reminder light will remain on until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. If the driver has buckled his or her seat belt and later unbuckles the seat belt, the reminder system will be activated from Step 1) or 2) according to the vehicle’s speed. When the vehicle’s speed is less than 15 km/h, the reminder will start from Step 1). When the vehicle’s speed is more than 15 km/h, the reminder will start from Step 2). The reminder will be automatically canceled when the driver’s seat belt is buckled or the ignition switch is turned off. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder If there is a person sitting in the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat belt is unbuckled when the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position, the front passenger's seat belt reminder will activate. EXAMPLE (2) 81RM010005 (2) The sensor of the front passenger’s seat belt reminder The seat belt reminder sensor (2) detects whether a person is sitting on the front seat. The sensor of the front passenger's seat belt reminder is located in the bottom seat cushion. The front passenger’s seat belt reminder works in the same manner as the driver’s seat belt reminder. NOTICE • The sensor of the front passenger’s seat belt reminder is located in the bottom seat cushion. If heavy or sharp objects are put on the seat cushion, or a removal, disassembly and modification of the passenger’s seat are performed, the sensor may not work properly or can be damaged. Do not put heavy or sharp objects on the seat cushion. Do not remove, disassemble and modify the passenger’s seat. • Depending on the variety of seat cover, operation of the sensor may be adversely affected. MARUTI SUZUKI highly recommends that you use MARUTI SUZUKI genuine seat cover exclusively for this vehicle. If a seat cover is installed, consult with a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. • If you spill liquid such as liquid aromatics, soft drinks or juice on the front passenger’s seat cushion, the sensor of the front passenger’s seat belt reminder located in the seat cushion can be damaged. Immediately wipe it dry with a soft cloth when spilled. (Continued) 1-10 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING NOTICE Seat belt hanger EXAMPLE (Continued) • When sitting on the front passenger’s seat, it is very important that the passenger sits upright, leaning against the seat backrest and centered on the seat cushion in order for the seatbelt reminder system to function effectively. An occupant sitting improperly (slouches, turns sideways, sits forward or sideways) may hamper the functioning of this system as it may not detect the occupant. NOTE: • If you put an object on the passenger’s seat, the weight of the object will be sensed by the sensor and the front passenger’s seat belt reminder light will come on and then the interior buzzer may beep. • If a child or a small sized person sits on the front passenger’s seat or the cushion is put on the front passenger’s seat, the weight may not be sensed by the sensor and the interior buzzer may not beep. Seat belt inspection 81RM01002 NOTICE • When you move a seatback, make sure the belt webbing is hooked in the seat belt hangers so the seat belts are not caught by the seatback, seat hinge, or seat latch. This helps prevent damage to the belt system. • Make sure the belt webbing is not twisted. EXAMPLE 81RM01006 Periodically check if the seat belts work properly and are not damaged. Check the webbing, buckles, latch plates, retractors, anchorages and guide loops. Replace any seat belts which do not work properly or are damaged. NOTE: Maruti Suzuki recommends use of Maruti Suzuki Genuine accessory of “Seat cover”. 1-11 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING WARNING Inspect all seat belt assemblies after any collision. Any seat belt assembly which was in use during a collision (other than a very minor one) should be replaced, even if damage to the assembly is not obvious. Any seat belt assembly even which was not in use during a collision must be replaced if the seat belt pretensioners were activated. The pretensioners and the load limiter only function once. In case they did not activate, consult with a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. Child restraint systems Child restraint EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 60G332 The following types of child restraint systems are available generally. 80JC016 Booster seat EXAMPLE Infant restraint – rear seat only EXAMPLE 80JC008 80JC007 1-12 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING MARUTI SUZUKI highly recommends that you use a child restraint system to restrain infants and small children. Many different types of child restraint systems are available; check that the restraint system you select meets applicable safety standards. EXAMPLE All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats either by seat belts (lap belts or the lap portion of lapshoulder belts) or by special rigid lower anchor bars built into the seat. NOTE: Observe any statutory regulation about child restraints. NOTE: Maruti Suzuki recommends use of Maruti Suzuki Genuine accessory child seat. 69RHS165 61M0241 WARNING • Do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger's seat since a child restraint system cannot be installed appropriately. • If you install a child restraint system in the rear seat, slide the front seat far enough forward so that the child’s feet do not touch the front seatback. This will help avoid injury to the child in the event of an accident. WARNING The luggage areas do not feature a structure that can accommodate people. Do not allow a child to ride in such areas. Otherwise, there is the danger of accidents due to sudden braking, etc. Do not let a child play in luggage areas even while the vehicle is stopped on the road. 1-13 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING EXAMPLE WARNING Children could be endangered in a collision if their child restraint systems are not properly secured in the vehicle. When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions below. Secure the child in the restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Installation with lap-shoulder seat belts ELR type belt EXAMPLE WARNING 65D608 EXAMPLE Do not hold a child on a passenger's lap when the vehicle is in motion. Even if the passenger holds the child tightly, he/she would not be supported enough in the event of an accident and it could result in a serious injury of the child. 80JC021 Install your child restraint system according to the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. Check that the seat belt is securely latched. Move the child restraint system in all directions to check that it is securely installed. When you put your child in the child restraint system, appropriately slide the front seat forward not to touch a part of your child’s body. 65D609 1-14 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING Child restraint system Child restraint The suitability of each passenger’s seat position for carriage of children and fitting of child restraint system is shown in the table below. Whenever you carry children up to 12 years of age, properly use the child restraints which conform to AIS 072, the standard for child restraints, referring to the table. Seating position (or other site) MASS GROUP Front Passenger Rear Outboard Rear Center Intermediate Outboard Intermediate Center Group 0 Up to 10 kg X U X N.A. N.A. Group 0+ Up to 13 kg X U X N.A. N.A. Group I 9 to 18 kg X U X N.A. N.A. Group II 15 to 25 kg X U X N.A. N.A. Group III 22 to 36 kg X U X N.A. N.A. Key of letters to be inserted in the above table: U =Suitable for ‘universal’ category restraints approved for use in this mass group X =Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group N.A = Seat position not available for children in this mass group. NOTE: ‘universal’ is the category in the AIS 072. : ‘Outboard’ indicates window side seat. 1-15 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING Seat belt pretensioner system EXAMPLE 11 56RM02001R WARNING This section describes your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle’s seat belt pretensioner system. Read and follow all these instructions carefully to minimize your risk of severe injury or death. To determine if your vehicle is equipped with a seat belt pretensioner system at the front seating positions, check the label on the seat belt at the bottom part. If the letter “p” appear as illustrated, your vehicle is equipped with the seat belt pretensioner system. You can use the pretensioner seat belts in the same manner as ordinary seat belts. Read this section and “Supplemental restraint system (airbags)” section to learn more about the pretensioner system. The seat belt pretensioner system works with the supplemental restraint system (airbags). The collision sensors and the electronic controller of the airbag system also control the seat belt pretensioners. The pretensioners are triggered only when there is a frontal collision severe enough to trigger the airbags and the seat belts are fastened. For precautions and general information including servicing the pretensioner system, refer to “Supplemental restraint system (airbags)” section in addition to this “Seat belt pretensioner system” section, and follow all those precautions. The pretensioner is located in each front seat belt retractor. The pretensioner tightens the seat belt so the belt fits the occupant’s body more snugly in the event of a frontal collision. The retractors will remain locked after the pretensioners are activated. Upon activation, some noise will occur and some smoke may be released. These conditions are not harmful and do not indicate a fire in the vehicle. The driver and all passengers must be properly restrained by fastening seat belts at all times, whether or not a pretensioner is equipped at their seating position, to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a collision. Sit fully back in the seat; sit up straight; do not lean forward or sideways. Adjust the belt so the lap portion of the belt is worn low across the pelvis, not across the waist. Please refer to “Seat adjustment” section and the instructions and precautions about the seat belts in this “Seat belts and child restraint systems” section for details on proper seat and seat belt adjustments. Please note that the pretensioners along with the airbags will activate in severe frontal collisions. They are not designed to activate in rear impacts, roll-overs, or minor frontal collisions. The pretensioners can be activated only once. If the pretensioners are activated (that is, if the airbags are activated), have the pretensioner system serviced by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop as soon as possible. 1-16 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING The pretensioner system or the airbag system may not work properly if any of the following conditions occurs. • If the air bag light on the instrument cluster does not come on briefly, when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”. • If the air bag light comes on and stays on for more than 10 seconds, when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”. • If the air bag light comes on while driving. Do not touch pretensioner system components or wiring. The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or yellow tubing, and the couplers are yellow. When scrapping your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle, ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop, body repair shop, or scrap yard for assistance. Have both systems inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop as soon as possible. Service on or around the pretensioner system components or wiring must be performed only by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop who is specially trained. Improper service could result in unintended activation of pretensioners or could render the pretensioner inoperative. Either of these two conditions may result in personal injury. To prevent damage or unintended activation of the pretensioners, check that the battery is disconnected and the ignition switch has been in “LOCK” position for at least 90 seconds before performing any electrical service work on your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle. 1-17 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING Supplemental restraint system (airbags) EXAMPLE (2) WARNING (1) This section describes the protection provided by your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle’s supplemental restraint system (airbags). Read and follow all instructions carefully to minimize your risk of severe injury or death in the event of a collision. (5) Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system consisting of the following components in addition to a lapshoulder belt at each seating position. (1) Driver’s front airbag module (2) Front passenger’s front airbag module (3) Front seat belt pretensioners (4) Airbag controller (5) Forward collision sensor (3) (4) 69RH152 1-18 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING WARNING • SRS airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts. SRS airbag system is the supplemental restraint system and will provide the effectiveness by using the seat belts at the same time. If you and the passengers do not fasten their seat belts, it may result in severe injury in a sudden braking or a collision. Even when you drive the vehicle equipped with SRS airbag system, make sure to fasten seat belt. • If the seat belts are not fastened properly, airbags may not provide the best performance. This may cause severe injury in a sudden braking and a collision. Make sure that the driver and all the passengers fasten the seat belts properly in a correct posture. (Continued) WARNING (Continued) • As the airbag may not provide the best performance and it may result in severe injury in case of emergency, observe the following points. – Do not modify the suspension. If the vehicle height or the stiffness of the suspension were to change, airbag malfunction may result. – When installing a grille guard, etc., on the front of the vehicle, consult a Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop. If you modify the front part of the vehicle, the airbag system may not work properly. – When installing radio equipment, etc., consult a Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop. Radio waves, etc., from a radio may adversely affect the computer module used in the airbag system. • If the airbag-related parts are replaced or repaired, which has an impact on the airbag functions, the airbag may activate unnecessarily or may not activate when necessary. The following situations may give a negative impact to the airbag system. (Continued) WARNING (Continued) In these cases, consult a Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop. – Removing the steering wheel, repairing the areas around the steering wheel, etc. – Center console repair, repairs around the instrument cluster, repairs under the front seat, and repairs of electrical wiring – Installation of audio equipment, etc. – Sheet metal painting and repairs around the dashboard – Replacement of the front seat and repairs around the seat – Repairs around the front pillar, the back pillar or the roof side – Repairs around the center pillar 1-19 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING If AIRBAG warning light on the instrument cluster does not blink or come on when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON” position, or comes on while driving, the airbag system (or the seat belt pretensioner system) may not work properly. Have the airbag system inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop as soon as possible. WARNING Front airbags EXAMPLE Airbag symbol meaning 59RN02240 • If you place any objects on the instrument panel, these objects may move and interfere with driver's view or safe driving. Also, the front passenger's front airbag may not work properly or these objects may be thrown out when the airbag inflates in an accident. Do not place any objects on the instrument panel. 81RM01008 Front airbags are designed to inflate in severe frontal collisions when the ignition switch is in “ON” position or the ignition mode is “ON”. 72M00150 You may find this label on the sun visor. WARNING AIRBAG warning light NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Front airbags are not designed to inflate in rear impacts, side impacts, rollovers or minor frontal collisions, since they would offer no protection in those types of accidents. Since an airbag deploys only one time during an accident, seat belts are needed to restrain occupants from further movements during the accident. Therefore, an airbag is not a substitute for seat belts. To maximize your protection, always fasten your seat belts. Be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident. 63J030 1-20 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING Driver’s front airbag EXAMPLE The driver’s front airbag is located behind the center pad of the steering wheel and the front passenger’s front airbag is located behind the passenger’s side of the dashboard. The words “SRS AIRBAG” are molded into the airbag covers to identify the location of the airbags. EXAMPLE WARNING 69RH165 Front passenger’s front airbag EXAMPLE • If the airbag stored place is damaged or cracked, the airbag system may not work properly, which could result in serious injury in the event of a collision. Have your vehicle inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. • If you smash the airbag stored place or apply a strong impact to it, the airbag may not work properly or may inflate unexpectedly, resulting in serious injury. Do not smash the airbag stored place or apply a strong impact to it. 61M0241 WARNING Do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger's seat since a child restraint system cannot be installed appropriately. Refer to “Seat belts and child restraint systems” section for details on securing your child. 81RM010009 1-21 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING Front passenger’s front airbag precautions Conditions of front airbags deployment (inflation) EXAMPLE Conditions when front airbags may inflate Receiving a strong impact to the lower body of your vehicle, the front airbags may inflate. EXAMPLE 80J097 69RHS170 WARNING • When riding in the front passenger’s seat or when allowing a child to ride in this seat, be sure to observe the following points. Failure to do so may result in serious injury due to major impact if the airbag is deployed. – Do not position your hands or feet on the airbag unit area, and do not position your face, chest, etc., close to this area. – Do not allow a child to stand in front of the airbag unit area or sit on a passenger's lap in the front passenger’s seat. Have a child ride in the rear seat wearing a seat belt. • Frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform at more than about 25 km/h EXAMPLE 80J099 • Hitting a curb or medial strip EXAMPLE (1) (1) 80J098E • Strong impact equivalent to frontal collision such as above at left and right angles of about 30 degrees (1) or less from the front of your vehicle 80J100E • Falling into a deep hole or ditch 1-22 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING • Frontal collision to a stopped vehicle at less than about 50 km/h EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (1) EXAMPLE 80J101 80J105E • Landing hard or falling 80J103 Front airbags may not inflate The front airbags may not inflate when a strong impact has not occurred since the collision object (including living being like animals) was easy to be deformed or moved, or the collided portion of your vehicle was easy to be deformed. Also, front airbags may not inflate in many cases when the collision angle is greater than about 30 degrees at left and right angles from the front of your vehicle.Also, in certain collisions at low speed ,the air bags may not inflate. • Collision that the front of your vehicle goes under the bed of a truck etc. EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 80J104 EXAMPLE • Collision with a fixed wall or guardrail at left and right angles of greater than about 30 degrees (1) from the front of your vehicle • Collision with a utility pole or stumpage 80J106 • Frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform at less than about 25 km/h 80J102 1-23 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING Front airbags do not inflate Front airbags do not inflate in rear impacts, side impacts or rollovers, etc. However, these might inflate in a strong impact. How the system works EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 80J110 • Vehicle rollover 80J120 • Impact from the rear EXAMPLE 80J119 • Impact from the side In a frontal collision, the collision sensors will detect rapid deceleration, and if the controller judges that the deceleration represents a severe frontal collision, the controller will trigger the inflators. The inflators inflate the appropriate airbags with nitrogen or argon gas. The inflated airbags provide a cushion for your head and upper body. The airbag inflates and deflates so quickly that you may not even realize that it has activated. The airbag will neither hinder your view nor make it harder to exit the vehicle. CAUTION Airbags must inflate quickly and forcefully in order to reduce the chance of serious or fatal injuries. However, an unavoidable consequence of the quick inflation is that the airbag may irritate bare skin, such as the facial area against a front airbag. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation. Also, upon inflation, a loud noise will occur and some powder and smoke will be released. These conditions are not harmful and do not indicate a fire in the vehicle. Be aware, however, that some airbag components may be hot for a while after inflation. 1-24 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING A seat belt helps keep you in the proper position for maximum protection when an airbag inflates. Adjust your seat as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. Sit fully back in your seat; sit up straight; do not lean over the steering wheel or dashboard. Front occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door. Refer to “Seat adjustment” section and “Seat belts and child restraint systems” section in this section for details on proper seat and seat belt adjustments. EXAMPLE 65D610 WARNING • Do not position your face, chest, etc., close to the steering wheel or instrument cluster, and do not rest your feet up into this area. Otherwise, there is the risk of serious injury due to major impact if the airbag were to be deployed. • Do not attach any objects to, or place any objects over, the steering wheel or dashboard. Do not place any objects between the airbag and the driver or front passenger. These objects may interfere with airbag operation or may be propelled by the airbag in the event of a collision. Also, these objects may move when you start moving vehicle or while vehicle is moving, they may interfere with driver’s view or safe driving. In each conditions may cause severe injury. • Do not strike or apply significant levels of impact to the airbag component areas. It can cause the airbags to malfunction. • Do not modify the steering wheel, such as replacing it, placing stickers on it, painting it or putting the cover on it. (Continued) WARNING (Continued) • Do not place stickers on the airbag units or the surrounding areas or paint them. Also, do not attach any accessories, fragrances, electronic toll control units, portable car navigation systems, etc. to this area, and do not lean umbrellas or other objects against it. • Do not attach accessories (except for Maruti Suzuki genuine products), etc., to the windshield or the inside rearview mirror. • Even though your vehicle is moderately damaged by a collision, it may not be severe enough to trigger front airbags to inflate. If your vehicle sustains any front-end or side damage, have the airbag system inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to ensure that it works properly. Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module which records information about the airbag system if the airbags deploy in a collision. The module records information about overall system status, and which sensors activated the deployment. Servicing the airbag system If the airbags inflate, have the airbags and related components replaced by a Maruti 1-25 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING Suzuki authorised workshop as soon as possible. If your vehicle ever gets in deep water and the driver’s floor is submerged, the airbag controller could be damaged. If this happens, ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to check the airbag system as soon as possible. Special procedures are required for servicing or replacing an airbag. For that reason, only a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop should be allowed to service or replace your airbags. Remind anyone who services your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle that it has airbags. Service on or around airbag components or wiring must be performed only by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. Improper service could result in unintended airbag deployment or could render the airbag inoperative. Either of these two conditions may result in severe injury. To prevent damage or unintended inflation of the airbag system, check that the battery is disconnected and the ignition switch has been in “LOCK” position for at least 90 seconds before performing any electrical service work on your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle. Do not touch airbag system components or wires. The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or yellow tubing, and the couplers are yellow for easy identification. CAUTION If you do not handle the airbags properly, they may inflate unexpectedly, resulting in personal injury. When scrapping the airbags or the vehicle that has the airbags, consult a Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop. Exhaust gas warning EXAMPLE 81RM01010 WARNING Avoid breathing exhaust gases. Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, a potentially lethal gas that is colorless and odorless. Since carbon monoxide is difficult to detect by itself, take the following precautions to help prevent carbon monoxide from entering your vehicle. • Do not leave engine running in garages or confined areas, with passengers inside. This may result in accumulation of carbon-monoxide in cabin and may lead to suffocation or breathing problems and lead to death. (Continued) 1-26 81RM0-74E FOR SAFE DRIVING WARNING (Continued) • Do not park with the engine running for a long period of time, even in an open area. In case of long periods, danger of choking and death on being inside the vehicle is a possibility when the engine is running. If it is necessary to sit for a short time in a parked vehicle with the engine running, make sure the air intake selector is set to “FRESH AIR” and the blower is at high speed • Avoid operating the vehicle with the tailgate open. If it is necessary to do so, check that the all windows are closed, and the blower is at high speed with the air intake selector set to FRESH AIR. • To allow proper operation of your vehicle’s ventilation system, keep the air inlet grill in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves or other obstructions at all times. (Continued) WARNING (Continued) • Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clear of snow and other material to help reduce the buildup of exhaust gases under the vehicle. This is particularly important when parked in blizzard conditions. • Have the exhaust system inspected periodically for damage and leakage. Any damage or leakage should be repaired immediately. 1-27 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING BEFORE DRIVING 60G404 Keys ...................................................................................... 2-1 Doors .................................................................................... 2-2 2 Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller/ Keyless entry system transmitter (if equipped) ............... 2-7 Security system (if equipped) ............................................ 2-16 Windows .............................................................................. 2-19 Mirrors .................................................................................. 2-20 Instrument cluster ............................................................... 2-25 Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-26 Tachometer (if equipped) ................................................... 2-26 Fuel gauge ........................................................................... 2-26 Brightness control .............................................................. 2-27 Information display ............................................................. 2-28 Warning and indicator lights .............................................. 2-36 Lighting control lever ......................................................... 2-44 Front fog light switch (if equipped) ................................... 2-46 Headlight leveling switch ................................................... 2-46 Turn signal control lever .................................................... 2-47 Hazard warning switch ....................................................... 2-48 Windshield wiper and washer lever .................................. 2-48 Tilt steering lock lever (if equipped) .................................. 2-50 Horn ...................................................................................... 2-51 Heated rear window switch (if equipped) ......................... 2-51 Vehicle loading .................................................................... 2-52 Trailer towing ....................................................................... 2-52 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Keys Immobilizer System EXAMPLE 54G489 Your vehicle comes with a pair of keys. The key(s) may or may not be equipped with a transmitter depending on model variant. Keep the spare key in a safe place. One key can open all of the locks on the vehicle. The key identification number is stamped on a metal tag provided with the keys or on the keys. Keep the tag (if equipped) in a safe place. If you lose your keys, you will need this number to have new keys made. Write the number below for your future reference. KEY NUMBER: This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft by electronically disabling the engine starting system. The engine can be started only with your vehicle’s original immobilizer ignition key or keyless push start system remote controller which has an electronic identification code programmed into it. The key or remote controller communicates the identification code to the vehicle when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”. If you need to make spare keys or remote controllers, see your Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. The vehicle must be programmed with the correct identification code for the spare. A key made by an ordinary locksmith will not work. 80JM122 If the immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light blinks when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position or the ignition mode is “ON”, the engine will not start. NOTICE Do not modify or remove the immobilizer system. If modified or removed, the system cannot be operated properly. For vehicles without keyless push start system If this light blinks or comes on, turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position, then turn it back to the “ON” position. If the light still blinks or comes on after the ignition switch is turned back to the “ON” position, there may be something wrong with your key or with the immobilizer system. Ask your Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to have the system inspected. For vehicles with keyless push start system If this light blinks or comes on, change the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF), then change back to “ON”. Also refer to “If the PUSH indicator light blinks and the engine cannot be started” in “Starting the Engine (Vehicle with Keyless Push Start System)” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. If the light still blinks or comes on after the ignition mode is changed back to “ON”, there may be something wrong with your key or with the immobilizer system. Ask your Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to have the system inspected. 2-1 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING The immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light may also blink if the remote controller is not in the vehicle when you close the door or attempt to start the engine. NOTE: • If you lose your immobilizer ignition key or remote controller, ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop as soon as possible to deactivate the lost one, and to make a new key or remote controller. • If you own other vehicles with immobilizer keys, keep those keys away from the ignition switch or the engine switch when using your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle. Otherwise, or the engine may not be started because they may interfere with your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle’s immobilizer system. • If you attach any metal objects to the immobilizer key or remote controller, it may not start the engine. • This immobilizer system is maintenancefree. NOTICE The immobilizer key and remote controller are sensitive electronic instruments. To avoid damaging them: • Do not expose them to impacts, moisture or high temperature such as on the dashboard under direct sunlight. • Keep them away from magnetic objects. Ignition Key Reminder A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind you to remove the ignition key if it is in the ignition switch when the driver’s door is opened. Doors WARNING • When a seat belt or luggage is caught by a door, the door cannot be shut properly and it may open while driving. This may cause an accident. Close a door not to catch a seat belt or luggage in the door. • When you keep the tailgate open with the engine running, exhaust gases will enter the vehicle and cause carbon monoxide poisoning. This may cause severe health problems or death in the worst case. Do not keep the tailgate open with the engine running. • To prevent fire or theft, stop the engine and lock the doors when leaving the vehicle. • When opening a door, be careful of the surrounding area. An accident, such as a collision with the vehicle or a pedestrian behind your vehicle, may occur. Be very careful when opening a door especially on a windy day. (Continued) 2-2 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING WARNING (Continued) • When a child opens or closes a door, his / her hands, legs or head may be caught in the door and this may cause injury. Opening or closing a door should be performed not by a child but by an adult. Side door locks To unlock a driver’s door from the outside of the vehicle, insert the key and turn the top of the key toward the rear of the vehicle. EXAMPLE (1) (4) EXAMPLE (2) (1) (2) (3) CAUTION • When the tailgate is not fully opened, it may be unexpectedly closed and this may cause injury. When opening the tailgate, open it fully. • Opening the tailgate right behind the exhaust pipes may cause burn injury. With the engine running, do not open the tailgate right behind the exhaust pipes. NOTE: • When leaving the vehicle even for a short period of time, do not leave cash or valuables in the vehicle, to avoid risk of theft. • Depending on the setting conditions of the security alarm and the opening conditions of the doors, an alarm may operate. Refer to “Security Alarm” in this section. 52RM20830 (1) (2) (3) (4) UNLOCK LOCK Front Rear To lock a driver’s door from the outside of the vehicle: • Insert a key and turn the top of the key toward the front of the vehicle, or Turn the lock knob forward, then pull and hold the door handle as you close the door. 81RM02001 (1) LOCK (2) UNLOCK To lock a door from the inside of the vehicle, turn the lock knob forward. Turn the lock knob backward to unlock the door. To lock a rear door from the outside of the vehicle, turn the lock knob forward and close the door. You do not need to pull and hold the door handle as you close the door. NOTE: Hold the door handle when you close a locked front door, or the door will not remain locked. 2-3 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING NOTE: You can switch the function that unlocks all doors from requiring two turns to requiring one turn, and vice versa, via the information display setting mode. For details on how to use the information display, refer to “Information display” in this section. Central door locking system EXAMPLE (2) (4) (1) To unlock the driver’s door only, insert the key in that door lock and turn the top of the key toward the rear of the vehicle once. (3) EXAMPLE 57RK007 (1) (2) (3) (4) LOCK UNLOCK Front Rear A (1) (2) You can lock and unlock all doors (including the tailgate) simultaneously by using the key in the driver’s door lock. To lock all doors simultaneously, insert the key in the driver’s door lock and turn the top of the key toward the front of the vehicle once. To unlock all doors simultaneously, insert the key in the driver’s door lock and turn the top of the key toward the rear of the vehicle twice. 81RM02006 (1) LOCK (2) UNLOCK You can also lock or unlock all doors by pressing the front or rear of the switch, respectively. NOTE: • You can also lock or unlock all doors by operating the transmitter or remote controller. Refer to “Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System Transmitter (if equipped)” in this section. • If your vehicle is equipped with the keyless entry system, you can also lock or unlock all doors by pushing the request switch. Refer to “Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System Transmitter (if equipped)” in this section. NOTE: • All doors are automatically unlocked when you turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and pull out the key. • If your vehicle is equipped with keyless entry system transmitter, all doors are automatically locked for safety when the vehicle speed reaches 15 km/h. • You can change the automatic locking or unlocking function mentioned above via the setting mode of the information display. For details on how to use the information display, refer to “Information display” in this section. 2-4 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Child-proof locks (rear door) Tailgate EXAMPLE (2) Vehicle with keyless entry system You can lock and unlock the tailgate by using the driver’s door lock key. WARNING Always check that the tailgate is closed and latched securely. Completely closing the tailgate helps prevent occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of an accident. Completely closing it also helps keep exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. (1) Type A EXAMPLE 81RM02007 (1) LOCK (2) UNLOCK When all the doors are closed and if the keyless push start remote controller is left in the trunk, the tailgate will be automatically unlatched. Each of the rear doors is equipped with a child-proof lock which can be used to help prevent unwanted opening of the door from inside the vehicle. When the lock lever is in LOCK position (1), the rear door can only be opened from outside. When the lock lever is in UNLOCK position (2), the rear door can be opened from inside or outside. Place the child-proof lock in LOCK position whenever children are seated in the rear. (Vehicle with keyless push start system) You can lock or unlock the tailgate by pushing the request switch (2), when the keyless push start system remote controller is within the switch’s operating range. For details refer to “Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System Transmitter” in this section. To open the tailgate, pull the tailgate handle (1) and lift the tailgate. (2) WARNING To open the tailgate, pull the tailgate handle (1) and lift the tailgate. (3) (1) (4) 81RM02008 (1) (2) (3) (4) Tailgate handle Request switch (if equipped) LOCK UNLOCK NOTE: When the tailgate is closed incompletely, follow the procedure below: 1) Push the tailgate unlatch switch (1) and open the tailgate. 2) After a few seconds, close the tailgate. 3) Make sure that the tailgate is closed completely. 2-5 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING If you cannot unlock the tailgate by using the key in the driver’s door lock due to a discharged battery or malfunction, follow the procedure below to unlatch the tailgate from inside the vehicle. 1) Remove the luggage compartment cover (if equipped) and fold the rear seat forward for easier access. Refer to “Folding rear seats” section for details on how to fold the rear seat forward. Type B EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (4) (2) EXAMPLE 81RM02010 4) To unlock the tailgate lock, pull the lock plate (4) up. 5) From outside the vehicle, pull up the tailgate handle (1) and lift the tailgate. (3) If the tailgate cannot be unlocked, have the vehicle inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. (2) 81RM02009 2) Remove the clips (2) by prying it off with a flat-bladed screwdriver as shown in the illustration. 3) Remove the trim (3) of the tailgate. (4) (1) (3) 81RM02011 (3) LOCK (4) UNLOCK You can lock or unlock the tailgate by using the key in the tailgate lock (1). To open the tailgate, pull up the tailgate handle (2) and lift the tailgate. 2-6 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller/ Keyless Entry System Transmitter (if equipped) Type A Type B EXAMPLE 55RM02009 Your vehicle is equipped with either a keyless push start system remote controller (Type A) or a keyless entry system transmitter (Type B). The remote controller has a keyless entry system and a keyless push start system. The transmitter has only a keyless entry system. For details, refer to the following explanations. WARNING Radio waves from the keyless push start system antenna(s) may interfere with operation of electrical medical equipment such as pacemakers. Failure to take the precautions listed below can increase the risk of severe injury or death due to radio wave interference. • Anyone who uses electrical medical equipment such as a pacemaker should consult the medical equipment supplier or their medical advisor about whether radio waves from the antenna(s) can interfere with the medical equipment. • If radio wave interference is a concern, have the function of the antenna(s) disabled by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller (Type A) The remote controller enables the following operations: • You can lock or unlock the doors by operating the lock/unlock buttons on the remote controller. Refer to the explanation in this section. • You can lock or unlock the doors by pushing the request switch. For details, refer to the explanation in this section. • You can start the engine without using an ignition key. For details, refer to “Engine Switch” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. EXAMPLE (1) (2) 55RM02010 (1) Lock button (2) Unlock button You can lock or unlock all doors (including the tailgate) simultaneously by operating the remote controller near the vehicle. 2-7 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Central door locking system • To lock all doors, push the lock button (1) once. • To unlock only the driver’s door, push the unlock button (2) once. • To unlock other doors, push the unlock button (2) once again. NOTE: You can switch the function that unlocks all doors from twice operations to once operation, and vice versa, via the setting mode of the information display. For details on how to use the information display, refer to “Information Display” in this section. The turn signal lights will flash once and the siren will sound once when the doors are locked. When the doors are unlocked: • The turn signal lights will flash twice and the siren will sound twice. • If the interior light switch is in the door position, the interior light will turn on for about 15 seconds and then fade out. If you press the engine switch during this time, the light will start to fade out immediately. Be sure the doors are locked after you operate the lock button (1). If no door is opened within about 30 seconds after the unlock button (2) is operated, the doors will automatically lock again. NOTE: • If you lock the doors using the remote controller when the engine hood is open, the siren will sound 3 times to remind you. • If the security system (if equipped) was triggered due to an unauthorized entry into the vehicle and then you unlock the doors using the remote controller, the siren will sound 4 times to remind you. If this happens, check whether your vehicle has been broken into while you were away from it. • If you push both the lock button (1) and unlock button (2) simultaneously, then you push any one of the buttons within 5 seconds, the siren will not sound. However, If you push one of the buttons twice within 5 seconds, or push one of the buttons 5 seconds later, the siren will sound. • You can set whether the siren sounds when locking or unlocking the door(s) via the setting mode of the information display. For details on how to use the information display, refer to “Information Display” in this section. NOTE: • The maximum operating distance of the remote controller is about 5 m (16 ft.), but this can vary depending on the surroundings, especially near other transmitting devices such as radio towers or CB (Citizen’s Band) radios. • The door locks cannot be operated with the remote controller if the ignition mode is other than the “LOCK”(OFF). • When any door is open, if you push the lock button on the remote controller, the exterior buzzer will sound and doors cannot be locked. • If you lose one of the remote controllers, ask your Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop as soon as possible for a replacement. Be sure to have your dealer program the new remote controller code in your vehicle’s memory so that the old code is erased. Car locator function This function helps in locating the vehicle. Push both of the lock button (1) and unlock button (2) for more than 3 seconds. The turn signal lights will blink for about 27.5 seconds. Also, the siren will sound for about 27.5 seconds at the same time. To cancel the car locator function, press any button (lock or unlock). You can also change the ignition mode to “ON” to cancel the car locator function. 2-8 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING NOTE: The car locator function will not activate when the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON” or pre warning / full blast warning by shock sensor or alarm is in activated condition. To unlock a door or all doors: • Push one of the request switches once to unlock only one door. • Push one of the request switches twice to unlock all doors. Keyless unlocking/locking using the request switches NOTE: You can switch the function that unlocks all doors from twice operations to once operation, and vice versa, via the setting mode of the information display. For details on how to use the information display, refer to “Information Display” in this section. (2) (2) EXAMPLE 81RM02012 When the remote controller is within the operating range described in this section, you can lock or unlock the doors (including the tailgate) by pushing the request switch (1) on the driver’s door handle, front passenger’s door handle or tailgate (2). To lock all doors when all doors are unlocked: • To lock all doors, push one of the request switches once. The turn signal lights will flash once and the siren will sound once when the doors are locked. When the doors are unlocked: • The turn signal lights will flash twice and the siren will sound twice. • If the interior light switch is in the door position, the interior light will turn on for about 15 seconds and then fade out. If you press the engine switch during this time, the light will start to fade out immediately. • If the security system (if equipped) was triggered due to an unauthorized entry into the vehicle and then you unlock the doors using the request switch, the siren will sound 4 times to remind you. If this happens, check whether your vehicle has been broken into while you were away from it. • You can set whether the siren sounds when locking or unlocking the door(s) via the setting mode of the information display. For details on how to use the information display, refer to “Information Display” in this section. Be sure the doors are locked after you operate the request switch to lock the doors. NOTE: • The door locks cannot be operated by the request switch under the following conditions: – If any door is open or is not completely closed. – If the ignition mode is other than “LOCK” (OFF). • If no doors are opened within about 30 seconds after unlocking the doors by pushing the request switch, the doors will be locked again automatically. NOTE: • If you lock the doors using the request switch or the lock switch on the keyless push start system remote controller when the engine hood is open, the siren will sound 3 times to remind you. • Do not operate request switch with sharp metal object. • Do not use high pressure water on request switch. NOTICE 2-9 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING (1) EXAMPLE (1) (1) • If a spare remote controller is in the vehicle, the request switches may not operate normally. • The remote controller will only operate a request switch if it is within the switch’s operating range. For example, if the remote controller is within the operating range of the driver’s door request switch but not the front passenger’s door request switch or the tailgate request switch, the driver’s door switch can be operated but the front passenger’s door switch or tailgate switch cannot be operated. 82PH02012 (1) 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) When the remote controller is within approximately 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) from a front door handle or the tailgate switch, you can lock or unlock the doors by pushing the request switch. NOTE: • If the remote controller is outside the request switch operating range described above, you will not be able to operate the request switch. • If the battery of the remote controller runs down or there are strong radio waves or noise, the request switch operating range may be reduced or the remote controller may be inoperative. • If the remote controller is too close to the door glass, the request switches may not operate. NOTICE The remote controller is a sensitive electronic instrument. To avoid damaging the remote controller: • Do not expose it to impacts, moisture or high temperature such as by leaving it on the dashboard under direct sunlight. • Keep the remote controller away from magnetic objects such as a television. NOTE: The keyless push start system may not function correctly in certain environments or under certain operating conditions such as the following: • When there are strong signals coming from a television, power station or a cellular phone. • When the remote controller is in contact with or covered by a metal object. • When a radio wave type remote keyless entry is used nearby. • When the remote controller is placed near an electronic device such as personal computer. Some additional precautions you should take and information you should be aware of are: • Make sure the key is stowed in the remote controller. If the remote controller becomes unreliable, you will not be able to lock or unlock the doors. • Be sure that the driver always carries the remote controller. • If you lose one of the remote controllers, ask your Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop as soon as possible for a replacement. Be sure to have your dealer program the new remote controller code in your vehicle’s memory so that the old code is erased. • You can use up to four remote controllers and the keys for your vehicle. Ask your Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop for details. 2-10 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING • The battery life of the remote controller is about two years, but it can vary depending on usage conditions. EXAMPLE 56RH00210 To stow the key into the remote controller, push the key in the remote controller until you hear a click. EXAMPLE (A) the arrow and pull the key out from the remote controller. Request switch warning buzzer This exterior buzzer beeps for about 2 seconds in the following conditions to warn you that the request switch will not working: • The request switch is pressed after all doors are closed with the ignition mode changed to “ACC” or “ON” position by pressing the engine switch when the controller is outside the vehicle. • The request switch is pressed in any of the following conditions after changing the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) by pressing the engine switch. – The remote controller is left inside the vehicle. – Any door (including the tailgate) is open. Press the request switch again after doing the following: With the ignition mode changed to “LOCK” (OFF) by pressing the engine switch, bring out the remote controller if it is inside the vehicle and check that all doors are completely closed. Reminder function EXAMPLE 81RM02037 If the remote controller is not in the vehicle, the buzzer sounds intermittently for about 2 seconds and the immobilizer system light on the instrument cluster blinks, under the following condition: • When one or more doors are opened and all of the doors are later closed with the ignition mode other than “LOCK”. The immobilizer system light will turn off within several seconds after the remote controller is returned to an area of the vehicle other than the rear luggage area. 56RH00211 To remove the key from the remote controller, push the button (A) in the direction of 2-11 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING If the remote controller is left in the vehicle and you lock the driver’s door or front passenger’s door as described below, the door will be automatically unlocked. • If you open the driver’s door and lock the door by turning the lock knob forward or pushing the power door locking switch, the driver’s door will be automatically unlocked. • If you open the front passenger’s door and lock the door by turning the lock knob forward or pushing the power door locking switch, the front passenger’s door will be automatically unlocked. NOTE: • The reminder function will not operate when the remote controller is on the instrument panel, in the glove box, in a storage compartment, in the sun visor or on the floor etc. • Be sure that the driver always carries the remote controller. • Do not leave the remote controller in the vehicle when leaving the vehicle. Battery replacement WARNING Swallowing a lithium battery may cause serious internal injury or death in the worst case. Do not allow anyone to swallow a lithium battery. Keep lithium batteries away from children and pets. If swallowed, contact a physician immediately. shop, check the year of manufacture for the battery. If the remote controller becomes unreliable, replace the battery. To replace the battery of the remote controller: EXAMPLE NOTICE • The remote controller is a sensitive electronic instrument. To avoid damaging it, do not expose it to dust or moisture or tamper with internal parts. • When you replace the battery by yourself, touch a metallic part and remove static electricity to prevent damaging the remote controller. NOTE: • Used batteries must be disposed of properly according to applicable rules or regulations and must not be disposed of with ordinary household trash. • You may damage the remote controller when replacing its battery. Asking a Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop is recommended. • When you purchase the battery by yourself at a Maruti Suzuki authorized work- (1) (2) 59RN03060 1) Pry open the remote controller. • To prevent the case from being damaged, cover the flat-bladed screwdriver with a soft cloth. Insert the flatbladed screwdriver in the slot (1) to pry it open. If you insert your nail in the gap (2), you can pry it open easily. 2-12 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING NOTICE When you pry open the remote controller with a flat-bladed screwdriver, you may damage the internal unit. Be careful not to damage the internal unit with the flat-bladed screwdriver. 2) Replace the battery. •Remove the old battery.To prevent the case from being damaged, use the flat- bladed screw driver covered with a soft cloth EXAMPLE (3) 6) Make sure the door locks can be operated with the remote controller. 7) Dispose of the used battery properly according to applicable rules or regulations. Do not dispose of lithium batteries with ordinary household trash. The keyless push start system, controller model K72R0 and key model R55R0 are in compliance with the essential requirements and other provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. WARNING Swallowing a lithium battery may cause serious internal injury. Do not allow anyone to swallow a lithium battery. Keep lithium batteries away from children and pets. If swallowed, contact a physician immediately. (1) NOTICE CR20 32 59RN03070 (3) Lithium disc type battery: CR2032 or equivalent 3) Place the battery (3) so its + terminal faces up as shown in the illustration. 4) Close the remote controller firmly. 5) Stow the key into the remote controller. • The remote controller is a sensitive electronic instrument. To avoid damaging it, do not expose it to dust or moisture or tamper with internal parts. • When replacing the battery by yourself, the remote controller could be damaged affected by static electricity. Discharge the static electricity built up in your body by touching metal before replacing the battery. NOTE: Used batteries must be disposed properly according to applicable rules or regulations and must not be disposed with ordinary household trash. 80JM133 (1) Crossed-out wheeled bin symbol The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol (1) indicates that a used battery should be collected separately from ordinary household trash.By ensuring the used battery is disposed of or recycled correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate battery disposal. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources. For more detailed information about disposing of or recycling of the used battery, consult a Maruti Suzuki Authorized Workshop. 2-13 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Keyless entry system transmitter (if equipped) (Type B) (2) EXAMPLE (1) NOTE: You can switch the function that unlocks all doors from requiring two pushes to requiring one push, and vice versa, via the information display setting mode. For details on how to use the information display, refer to “Information display” in this section. The turn signal lights will flash once and the siren will sound once when the doors are locked. 76MS011 (1) LOCK button (2) UNLOCK button You can lock or unlock all doors (including the tailgate) simultaneously by operating the transmitter near the vehicle. Central door locking system • To lock all doors, push LOCK button (1) once. • To unlock only the driver’s door, push UNLOCK button (2) once. • To unlock other doors, push UNLOCK button (2) once again. When the doors are unlocked: • The turn signal lights will flash twice and the siren will sound twice. • If the interior light switch is in DOOR position, the interior light will turn on for about 15 seconds and then fade out. If you insert the key into the ignition switch during this time, the light will start to fade out immediately. Check that the doors are locked after you operate LOCK button (1). NOTE: If no door is opened within about 30 seconds after UNLOCK button (2) is operated, the doors will automatically lock again. NOTE: • If you lock the doors using the transmitter when the engine hood is open, the siren will sound 3 times to remind you. • If the security system (if equipped) was triggered due to an unauthorized entry into the vehicle and then you unlock the doors using the transmitter, the siren will sound 4 times to remind you. If this happens, check whether your vehicle has been broken into while you were away from it. • Once you push both of the LOCK button (1) and UNLOCK button (2), then you push one of the buttons within 5 seconds, the siren will not sound. However, if you push one of the buttons 5 seconds later, the siren will sound. • You can set whether the siren sounds when locking or unlocking the door(s) via the setting mode of the information display. For details on how to use the information display, refer to “Information Display” in this section. NOTE: • The maximum operating distance of the keyless entry system transmitter is about 5 m (16 ft.), but this can vary depending on the surroundings, especially near other transmitting devices such as radio towers or CB (Citizen’s Band) radios. • The door locks cannot be operated with the transmitter, if the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch. • When any door is open, the door locks can only be unlocked with the transmitter, and the turn signal light will not flash. • If you lose one of the transmitters, ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop as soon as possible for a replacement. Have your dealer program the new transmitter code in your vehicle’s memory so that the old code is erased. 2-14 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING NOTICE The transmitter is a sensitive electronic instrument. To avoid damaging the transmitter: • Do not expose it to impacts, moisture or high temperature such as by leaving it on the dashboard under direct sunlight. • Keep the transmitter away from magnetic objects such as a television. Replacement of the Battery If the transmitter becomes unreliable, replace the battery. EXAMPLE (2) To replace the battery of the transmitter: EXAMPLE (1) (3) (2) 68LM249 Car locator function This function is to get the attention of others. Push both of the LOCK button (1) and UNLOCK button (2) for more than 3 seconds. The turn signal lights will blink for about 27.5 seconds. Also, the siren will sound for about 27.5 seconds at the same time. To cancel the car locator function, press any button (LOCK or UNLOCK). You can also cancel the car locator function by turning the ignition switch to “ON” position. NOTE: The car locator function will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch or pre warning / full blast warning by shock sensor or alarm is in activated condition. (3) Lithium disc type battery: CR1616 or equivalent 68LM248 1) Remove the screw (1), and open the transmitter cover. 2) Remove the transmitter (2). 3) Put the edge of a flat blade screwdriver in the slot of the transmitter (2) and pry it open. 4) Replace the battery (3) so its + terminal faces the “+” mark of the transmitter. 5) Close the transmitter and install it into the transmitter holder. 6) Close the transmitter cover, install and tighten the screw (1). 7) Make sure the door locks can be operated with the transmitter. 8) Dispose of the used battery properly according to applicable rules or regulations. Do not dispose of lithium batteries with ordinary household trash. 2-15 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Security System (if equipped) WARNING Swallowing a lithium battery may cause serious internal injury. Do not allow anyone to swallow a lithium battery. Keep lithium batteries away from children and pets. If swallowed, contact a physician immediately. (1) NOTICE • The transmitter is a sensitive electronic instrument. To avoid damaging it, do not expose it to dust or moisture or tamper with internal parts. • When replacing the battery by yourself, the transmitter could be damaged affected by static electricity. Discharge the static electricity built up in your body by touching metal before replacing the battery. NOTE: Used batteries must be disposed properly according to applicable rules or regulations and must not be disposed with ordinary household trash. The keyless entry system, transmitter model K81RA and controller model T61M0 are in compliance with the essential requirements and other provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC EXAMPLE 80JM133 (1) Crossed-out wheeled bin symbol The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol (1) indicates that a used battery should be collected separately from ordinary household trash.By ensuring the used battery is disposed of or recycled correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate battery disposal. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources. For more detailed information about disposing of or recycling the used battery, consult a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. The security system (if equipped) is armed after you lock all doors (including the engine hood and tailgate) by using the keyless entry system transmitter, keyless push start system remote controller or request switch. Once the system is armed, any attempt to open a door by using any other means (*) than the keyless entry system transmitter, keyless push start system remote controller or request switch or open the engine hood, will cause the alarm to be triggered. * These means include the following: – The key – The lock knob on a door – The central door locking switch – The tailgate handle Also, in case that you have set the shock sensor to enabled state and set sensitivity of the pre-warning function and full blast warning function to a level other than 0, the alarm will be triggered if there is any attempt to tamper with the vehicle. The shock sensor can be selected enabled or disabled state, and sensitivity of each warning can be adjusted as desired. To set the shock sensor, ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop or use the setting mode of the information display. 2-16 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING NOTE: • The default setting of the shock sensor is in the disabled state. Set to the enabled state and adjust sensitivity of each warning according to your preference. For details on how to use the information display, refer to “Information display” in this section. • Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop may have already set the shock sensor of the vehicle to the enabled state before you purchase it. Consult a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop for further information. NOTE: • The security system (if equipped) generates alarms when any of the predetermined conditions is met. However, the system does not have any function of blocking unauthorized entry into the vehicle. • Always use the keyless entry system transmitter to unlock the doors when the security system (if equipped) has been armed. Using a key instead will trigger the alarm. • If a person who does not know the security system (if equipped) is going to drive the vehicle, we recommend you explain the system and its operation to the person. Mistakenly triggering the alarm may cause a nuisance to others. • Even if the security system (if equipped) is armed, you should still be careful to guard against theft. Do not leave money or things of value in the vehicle. Without tachometer EXAMPLE (1) How to arm the security system (if equipped) Lock all doors (including the engine hood and tailgate) using the keyless entry system transmitter, keyless push start system remote controller or request switch. While the system is being armed, the indicator(1) continues to blink at intervals of approximately 2 seconds. With tachometer EXAMPLE (1) 81RM02003 81RM02004 NOTE: • To prevent the alarm from being accidentally triggered, avoid arming it while anyone remains inside the vehicle. The alarm will be triggered if any person inside opens the door, tailgate, engine hood, or swings the vehicle (if the shock sensor is in the enabled state). • The security system (if equipped) is not armed when all doors are locked using the key from outside, using the door lock knobs or the central door locking switch from inside. • If any door is not operated within approximately 30 seconds after the doors have been unlocked using the keyless entry system transmitter, keyless push start syste m remote controller or request switch, the doors are automatically locked again. When the doors are 2-17 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING locked, the security system (if equipped) will be armed. • If the security system (if equipped) indicator (1) blinks when the ignition switch is in “ON” position, or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON, there may be something wrong with the security system (if equipped) . Ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to inspect the system. How to disarm the security system (if equipped) Simply unlock the doors using the keyless entry system transmitter, keyless push start system remote controller or request switch.The security system (if equipped) indicator will go out, indicating that the security system (if equipped) is disarmed. How to stop the alarm Should the alarm be triggered accidentally, the alarm will stop by the following operations. • Press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “ON” or turn the ignition switch to “ON” position. • Unlock the doors using the keyless entry system transmitter. NOTE: • Even after the alarm has stopped, if you lock the doors using the keyless entry system transmitter, keyless puh start system remote controller or request switch. the security system (if equipped) will be rearmed. • If you disconnect the battery while the security system (if equipped) is in the armed condition or the alarm is actually in operation, the alarm will be re-triggered when the battery is then reconnected. • Even after the alarm has stopped at the end of the predetermined operation time, it will be triggered again if any of the doors, tailgate or engine hood is opened, or the vehicle feels a shock (if the shock sensor is in the enabled state), without disarming the security system (if equipped). Checking whether the alarm has been triggered during parking If the alarm was triggered and you then turn the ignition switch to “ON” position, or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON, the security system (if equipped) indicator will blink rapidly for about 8 seconds and a buzzer will beep 4 times during this period. If this happens, check whether the vehicle has been broken into while you were away from it. Security System (if equipped) indication • If any of the doors or tailgate are opened without unlocking by the keyless entry system transmitter, keyless push start system remote controller or request switch. all turn signal lights start to blink and the interior buzzer beeps intermittently. After 5 seconds, the siren will sound for about 27.5 seconds. The security system (if equipped) indicator continues to blink during this time. • If the engine hood is opened, all turn signal lights blink, and the siren sounds for about 27.5 seconds. The security system (if equipped) indicator continues to blink during this time. (If the shock sensor is in the enabled state) • If the vehicle feels a shock higher than the pre-warning sensitivity, the siren sounds for about 2 seconds (pre-warning). If the vehicle feel a shock higher than the full blast warning sensitivity, the siren sounds for about 5 seconds (full blast warning). The security system (if equipped) indicator continues to blink during this time. NOTE: If you set the full blast warning sensitivity higher than the pre-warning sensitivity in the setting mode of the information display, or the vehicle feels such shock as to be able to trigger the full blast warning, the full blast warning will be triggered preferentially. In this case, the pre-warning will not be triggered. 2-18 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Windows Power window controls The power windows can only be operated when the ignition switch is in “ON” position. Manual window control (if equipped) Rear EXAMPLE Front (4) EXAMPLE (1) (3) A 81RM02014 (2) EXAMPLE 81RM02015 60G010A Raise or lower the door windows by turning the handle located on the door panel. The dashboard has a switch(1) to operate the driver’s window and a switch(2) to operate the front passenger’s window. To open a window, push the bottom part (b) of the switch. To close the window,push the part (a) of the switch. (a) EXAMPLE The centre console has a switch to operate the rear right(4) and left(3) passenger windows, respectively CLOSE EXAMPLE OPEN 81A009 (b) 62SM02017 To open a window, push the top part of the switch. To close the window, lift up the top part of the switch. 2-19 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING The driver’s window has AUTO-DOWN feature for greater convenience (at toll booths or drive-through restaurants, for example). This means the driver can open the window without holding the window switch in DOWN position. Press down the driver’s window switch completely and release it. To stop the window before it reaches the FULL-DOWN position, pull up the switch briefly. Lock switch EXAMPLE A 81RM02016 The dashboard also has a lock switch for the passenger’s window(s). When you push in the lock switch, the passenger’s window(s) cannot be raised or lowered by operating any of the switches (2), (3) or (4) To restore normal operation, release the lock switch by pushing it again. WARNING • You should always lock the passenger’s window operation when there are children in the vehicle. Children can be seriously injured if they get part of their body caught by the window during operation. • To avoid injuring an occupant by window entrapment, check that no part of the occupant’s body such as hands or head is in the path of the power windows when closing them. • Always remove the ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle even only for a short time. Also do not leave children alone in a parked vehicle. Unattended children could use the power window switches and get trapped by the window. NOTE: If you drive with one of the rear windows open, you may hear a loud sound caused by air vibration. To reduce the sound, open the driver’s or front passenger’s window, or narrow the rear window opening. Mirrors WARNING Failure to observe following point may result in loss of vehicle control and cause an accident, leading to death or serious injury. Always follow below points while driving. • Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. • Always unfold all the outside rearview mirrors and adjust properly before driving. • Do not place objects in the rear of the vehicle which may hinder visibility or interfere with your vision from the rear window glass. Inside rearview mirror You can adjust the inside rearview mirror by hand to see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror. Type A EXAMPLE 74LHT0235 2-20 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING When driving at night, you can move the selector tab to the night position to reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you. Type B EXAMPLE WARNING 68LMT0205 WARNING • If you adjust the inside rearview mirror while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle, resulting in an accident. Adjust the inside rearview mirror before driving. EXAMPLE CAUTION Do not modify the inside rearview mirror or install a non-genuine wide mirror. It could result in injury during accident. EXAMPLE (2) • Always adjust the mirror with the selector set to the day position. • Only use the night position if it is necessary to reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you. Be aware that in this position you may not be able to see some objects that could be seen in the day position. WARNING Be careful when judging the size or distance of a vehicle or other object seen in the side convex mirror. Be aware that objects look smaller and appear farther away than when seen in a flat mirror. If you adjust the outside rearview mirrors while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle, resulting in an accident. Adjust the outside rearview mirrors before driving. (1) (3) Outside rearview mirrors 68LMT0206 (2) Day driving (3) Night driving Adjust the outside rearview mirrors so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the mirrors. 69RH166 To adjust the mirror, set the selector tab (1) to the day position, and then move the mirror up, down or sideways by hand to obtain the best view. 2-21 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING WARNING Electric Mirrors (if equipped) EXAMPLE (1) (2) (4) (3) If you adjust the outside rearview mirrors while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle, resulting in an accident. Adjust the outside rearview mirrors before driving. NOTICE L R 81RM02017 The switch to control the electric mirrors is located on the instrument panel. You can adjust the mirrors when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, or the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON”. To adjust the mirrors: 1) Move the selector switch (L - R knob) to the left or right to select the mirror you wish to adjust. 2) Press the control knob of the switch in the direction that corresponds to the direction in which you wish to move the mirror. 3) Return the selector switch to the center position to help prevent unintended adjustment. • The electric type outside rearview mirror operates even though the ignition switch is in the ACC position. However, to prevent unnecessary battery discharge, do not adjust the mirrors longer than necessary while the engine is not running • The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is pressed. Do not continue to press the switch in such a situation, as the motor may be damaged. • Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand which may cause damage to the motor. Outside Rearview Mirrors Folding Switch (if equipped) EXAMPLE (1) (2) 81RM02018 You can fold the mirrors when you park the vehicle in a narrow space. When the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON”, push the lower part (2) of the folding switch to fold the mirrors. To unfold the mirrors, push the upper part (1) of the switch. Make sure the mirrors are completely unfolded before you start driving. WARNING If you drive the vehicle with the cutside rearview mirrors folded, it may result in an accident. Do not drive the vehicle with the cutside rearview mirrors folded. 2-22 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING CAUTION Moving mirrors can pinch and injure a hand. Do not allow any one’s hand to get near the mirrors when folding and unfolding the mirrors. NOTE: • If you press the folding switch to open the outside rearview mirrors and simultaneously start the engine, then the outside rearview mirrors may get stuck during that moment. In such a situation, to open the outside rearview mirrors completely, again press the folding switch after starting the engine. • Slight time difference in opening of both outside rearview mirrors is due to angular positioning of the driver seat. Remote Folding Mirrors (if equipped) When the outside rearview mirrors folding switch is in the unfolded position, the outside rearview mirrors are folded or unfolded in conjunction with the door locking or engine switch operation. • When you lock the doors (including the tailgate) by using the remote controller or pushing the request switch, the mirrors will be folded automatically. • To unfold the mirrors, push the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “ACC” or “ON”. • The factory setting is that the function is enabled. You can switch the function from enabled to disabled, and vice versa. To switch the function for your preference, refer to “How to switch the remote folding mirrors function”. WARNING If you adjust the outside rearview mirrors while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle, resulting in an accident. Adjust the outside rearview mirrors before driving. NOTICE In cold conditions when the mirrors are frozen, disable the function. If the mirrors are folded and unfolded repeatedly without thawing, the mirrors may be damaged. NOTE: • If the doors are locked by using the key, lock knob on the door or power door locking switch, the mirrors will not be folded automatically. • If the outside rearview mirrors folding switch is in the folded position, the mirrors will not be unfolded automatically, even when the engine switch is pushed to change the ignition mode to ACC or ON. • If any of the doors is not opened within about 30 seconds after the doors are unlocked by using the keyless push start system remote controller or request switch, the doors will be locked again and the mirrors will be folded automatically. How to switch the remote folding mirrors function When the ignition mode is “LOCK (OFF)”, you can switch the function from the enabled state to the disabled state, and vice versa, using the following method. 1) Sit in the driver’s seat and make sure that all doors are closed. 2-23 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING • If any door is open, the open door warning light comes on. EXAMPLE (2) (1) 81RM02020 3) Push the lock end (3) (forward end) of the power door lock switch (4) to lock the doors, and then the unlock end (5) (backward end) to unlock the doors. Repeat the operations of this step for 4 times. EXAMPLE 81RM02019 2) Turn the lock knob (1) on the driver’s door rearward (2). NOTE: All operations included in the following steps 3) and 4) must be completed within 15 seconds. 4 times (3) (7) (6) 56RM03030 (6) Lock button (7) Unlock button Every time you perform the series of the above steps, the state of the remote folding mirrors function changes from the currently selected one to the other. You can check whether the system is enabled or disabled by the number of interior buzzer beeps at the end of the procedure as follows. System state Number of beeps Enabled 2 times Disabled Once If you cannot complete the operations in step 3) and 4) within 15 seconds correctly, the state of the remote folding mirrors function will not change and the interior buzzer does not beep. Perform the procedure again from the beginning. 4) Push any of the buttons on the keyless push start system remote controller 3 times. • Push either lock button or unlock button described above you like. • During operation, the doors are not locked or unlocked. (4) A (5) EXAMPLE 2-24 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Instrument cluster 1. 2. 3. 4. Speedometer Tachometer (if equipped) Information display Warning and indicator lights With tachometer EXAMPLE 1 4 2 3 4 81RM02021 Without tachometer EXAMPLE 1 4 4 3 81RM02022 2-25 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. Fuel gauge The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute. With tachometer EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (1 ) Speed alert system The speed alert system gives audible warning for alert of over-speed to driver. When vehicle speed exceeds about 80 km/ h, primary level warning with two beeps will sound every minute. When the vehicle speed exceeds about 120 km/h, secondary level warning with continuous beeps will sound. If the vehicle speed is slowed down to about 118 km/h, primary warning will resume. If the vehicle is slowed down to about 78 km/h, speed alert warning will stop. This buzzer does not indicate any malfunction in vehicle. Tachometer (if equipped) (2) (1) 81RM02023 81RM02044 Without tachometer NOTICE Never drive the vehicle with the engine revving in the zone(1) as shown or severe engine damage can result. Keep the engine speed below the red zone even when downshifting to a lower gear position. Refer to “Downshifting maximum allowable speeds” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. (1) (2) EXAMPLE 81RM02024 When the ignition switch is in “ON” position, this gauge gives an approximate indi- 2-26 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING cation of the amount of fuel in the fuel tank. “F” stands for full and “E” stands for empty. • If the indicator shows only one segment to “E”, refill the tank as soon as possible. If the last segment blinks, it means that the fuel is almost empty. NOTICE To minimize the possibility of damage to catalytic converter or other components of the vehicle, avoid driving the vehicle near empty fuel tank level. If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on, fill the fuel tank immediately. NOTE: The activation point of the low fuel warning light (1) varies depending on road conditions (for example, slope or curve) and driving conditions because of fuel movement in the tank. Brightness control When the position lights and/or headlights are on, the instrument cluster lights come on. With tachometer EXAMPLE (1) Your vehicle has a system to automatically dim the brightness of the instrument cluster lights when the position lights or headlights are on. When the position lights and/or headlights are on, you can control the meter illumination intensity. WARNING Do not adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights while driving. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle. 81RM02025 Without tachometer EXAMPLE (1) Refer to “Low fuel warning light” in “Warning and indicator lights” in this section for details. The mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the left side of the vehicle. 81RM02026 (1) Indicator selector knob 2-27 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING NOTE: • If you do not push the indicator selector knob (1) within several seconds of activating the brightness control, the brightness control display will be canceled automatically. (2) (3) (4) 69RH126 (2) Brightest (3) Initial setting (4) Dimmest To switch the display indication to the brightness control, select the indication as shown in the illustration to push the indicator selector knob (1) when the position lights and/or headlights are on. Information display With tachometer (1) NOTE: If you select the maximum brightness level when the position lights or headlights are on, the following functions will be canceled. • The function which automatically dims the brightness of instrument cluster lights • The function which operates with the brightness control, except maximum brightness level (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) EXAMPLE (2) 81RM02027 To change the brightness of the instrument cluster lights, continue to hold in the indicator selector knob (1). The indication will change as shown in the illustration. The illumination gets dimmer then returns to the brightest condition after it reaches the dimmest. 2-28 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Without tachometer (1) When the ignition switch is in “ON” position, the information display shows the following information. Display (A) Gearshift indicator (if equipped) Display (B) Gear position indicator (for Auto Gear Shift models) Display (C) Odometer / Trip meter / Fuel consumption / Driving range (A) (B) (E) Display (D) Clock (C) (D) EXAMPLE (1) Indicator selector knob (2) Information display EXAMPLE (3) (4) (3) (5) (3) Gear position (4) Manual mode indicator (5) Drive mode indicator Gearshift indicator (if equipped) 81RM02028 The display (B) shows some of the following indications. 69RM02003 Display (E) Fuel gauge (2) Gear position indicator (for Auto Gear Shift models) The display (A) shows the gearshift indicator. EXAMPLE NOTE: For Auto Gear Shift models, when the gearshift lever position and the gear position indication in the information display are unmatched, the indication will blink and the interior buzzer will sound. Refer to “Auto Gear Shift” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section for details. 56RH00272 Refer to “Gearshift indicator” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. 2-29 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Manual mode indicator When you are using the manual mode, the display shows the manual mode indicator (4). NOTE: The manual mode indicator will only appear when the gearshift lever is in “M” position. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) EXAMPLE (a) (b) Drive mode indicator When the gearshift lever is in “D”, the display shows the drive mode indicator (5). (c) For details on how to use the transmission, refer to “Using transmission” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. (d) WARNING If you attempt to adjust the display while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle. Do not attempt to adjust the display while driving. NOTE: • Indications will change when you push and release a knob. • The display shows estimated values. Indications may not be the same as actual values. Odometer / Trip meter / Fuel consumption / Driving range The display (C) shows one of the following indications, odometer, trip meter A, trip meter B, instantaneous fuel consumption, average fuel consumption or driving range. To switch the display indication (C), push the indicator selector knob (1) quickly. Odometer Trip meter A Trip meter B Instantaneous fuel consumption Average fuel consumption Driving range (e) Odometer The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. (f) NOTICE 69RM02004 Push the indicator selector knob (1). Keep track of your odometer reading and check the maintenance schedule regularly for required services. Increased wear or damage to certain parts can result from failure to perform required services at the proper mileage intervals. 2-30 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Trip meter A/Trip meter B The trip meters can be used to measure the distance traveled on short trips or between fuel stops. You can use the trip meter A or trip meter B independently. To reset the trip meter to zero, push and hold the indicator selector knob (1) for a while when the display shows the trip meter. NOTE: The indicated maximum value of the trip meter is 9999.9. When you run past the maximum value, the indicated value will return to 0.0. Instantaneous fuel consumption The display shows the value of instantaneous fuel consumption only when the vehicle is moving. NOTE: • The display does not show the value unless the vehicle is moving. • Depending on the vehicle’s specification, the fuel consumption units of initial setting are indicated as L/100km or km/L. • The indicated maximum value of instantaneous fuel consumption is one of the followings. No more than the maximum value will be indicated on the display even if the actual instantaneous fuel consumption is higher. – For L/100km setting: 30 – For km/L setting: 50 • The indication on the display may be delayed if fuel consumption is greatly affected by driving conditions. • The display shows estimated values. Indications may not be the same as actual values. • For “L/100km” or “km/L” setting, you can change the units that instantaneous fuel consumption is displayed in. Refer to “Setting mode” in this section. EXAMPLE (Initial setting) 76MH0A046 Average fuel consumption If you selected average fuel consumption the last time you drove the vehicle, the display shows the last value of average fuel consumption from previous driving when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. Unless you reset the value of average fuel consumption, the display indicates the value of average fuel consumption which includes average fuel consumption during previous driving. To reset the average fuel consumption to zero, push and hold the indicator selector knob (1) for a while when the display shows the average fuel consumption. NOTE: When you reset the indication or reconnect the negative (–) terminal to the battery, the value of average fuel consumption will be shown after driving for a while. To change the unit of average fuel consumption, while pushing and holding, turn the indicator selector knob (1). 2-31 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Driving range If you selected driving range the last time you drove the vehicle, the display indicates “---” for a few seconds and then indicates the current driving range when the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position. The driving range shown in the display is an indicative unit of the approximate distance you can drive until the fuel gauge indicates “E”, based on current driving conditions and the current fuel level in the fuel tank. When the low fuel warning light comes on, the display “---” will appear. If the low fuel warning light comes on, fill the fuel tank immediately regardless of the value of driving range shown in the display. As the driving range after refueling is calculated based on the most recent driving condition, the value is different each time you refuel. Clock The display (D) shows the time. To set the clock, follow “Setting mode” instructions in this section. WARNING If you attempt to adjust the display while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle. Do not attempt to adjust the display while driving. NOTE: When you disconnect either of the terminals to the battery and keep it for a minute, the clock indication will be initialized. Change the indication again to your preference after the reconnection. Fuel gauge The display (E) shows the fuel gauge. Refer to “Fuel gauge” in this section. NOTE: • If you refuel when the ignition switch is in “ON” position, the driving range may not indicate the correct value. • When you reconnect the negative (–) terminal to the battery, the value of driving range will be shown after driving for a while. • If there are substantial changes in the driving pattern or vehicle usage, the displayed range may vary significantly. 2-32 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Setting mode In the setting mode, you can set up the following functions. Indication Functions 12-hour format “ ” 24-hour format “ ” Central door locking system “ ” Automatic door locking function “ ” Automatic door unlocking function “ Door locking and unlocking siren “ Additional flashes of the turn signal “ Shock sensor “ ” ” ” ” 2-33 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Indication Functions Pre-warning sensitivity of the shock sensor “ ” Full blast warning sensitivity of the shock sensor “ ” Fuel consumption unit setting “ ” Fuel consumption unit setting “ ” Clock setting “ ” Initialization setting “ Exit the setting mode “ Push the indicator selector knob (1). ” ” NOTE: Depending on vehicle’s specifications, some items may not be displayed. Push and hold the indicator selector knob (1). 2-34 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING How to operate the setting mode: 1) When the ignition switch is in “ON” position and the vehicle is stationary, push the indicator selector knob (1) to switch the information display indication (C) to the odometer. 2) Push and hold the indicator selector knob (1) until the setting mode is appeared on the information display. 3) Push and/or hold the indicator selector knob (1) to select a function that you want to set up according to the above chart. 4) Push and/or hold the indicator selector knob (1) to register settings of the following functions. 75RM229 NOTE: • As shown in the above illustration, “ ” indicates on the display of currently setting item. • To go back to the higher level display during operation, push the indicator selector knob (1) to display “ ” or “ ” and then push and hold the indicator selector knob (1). Time indication of clock • : 12-hour format (default setting) • : 24-hour format gate) are locked or unlocked by using the keyless entry system transmitter Central door locking system “ ” • : Unlock all doors by turning the key once or operating the keyless entry system transmitter once • : Unlock all doors by turning the key or operating the keyless entry system transmitte twice (default setting) Additional flashes of the turn signal “ ” • : Turn signal flashes three times after the turn signal lever is returned (default setting) • : Disable the additional flashes of turn signal Automatic door locking function “ ” • : Disable the automatic door locking function • : Lock all doors when the vehicle speed reaches 15 km/h (default setting) Automatic door unlocking function “ ” • : Disable the automatic door unlocking function • : Unlock all doors when the key is pulled out from the ignition switch (default setting) Door locking and unlocking siren “ ” • : Siren sounds when the doors (including the tailgate) are locked or unlocked by using the keyless entry system transmitter (default setting) • : Siren does not sound when the doors (including the tail- Shock sensor “ ” • : Enable the shock sensor • : Disable the shock sensor (default setting) Pre-warning sensitivity of the shock sensor “ ” • : Disable the pre-warning • to : Adjust the pre-warning sensitivity of shock sensor (Lowest sensitivity level is L01 and highest is L15, and default setting is L14) Full blast warning sensitivity of the shock sensor “ ” • : Disable the full blast warning • to : Adjust the full blast warning sensitivity of shock sensor (Lowest sensitivity level is L01 2-35 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING and highest is L15, default setting is L09) and Fuel consumption unit setting • : Change the unit of instantaneous and average fuel consumption to “km/L”. (default setting) • : Change the unit of instantaneous and average fuel consumption to “L/100km”. Clock setting “ ” • To change the hour indication, push the indicator selector knob (1) repeatedly when the hour indication blinks. To change the hour indication quickly, push and hold the indicator selector knob (1). To set the hour indication, wait for a while without pushing the indicator selector knob (1) and the minute indication will blink. • To change the minute indication, push the indicator selector knob (1) repeatedly when the minute indication blinks. To change the minute indication quickly, push and hold the indicator selector knob (1). To set the minute indication, wait for a while without pushing the indicator selector knob (1). Initialization setting “ ” • : Initialize all settings 5) To exit the setting mode, switch the display to show “ ” and then push and hold the indicator selector knob (1). Warning and indicator lights Brake system warning light (Red Color) 82K170 Three different types of operations exist depending on the vehicle’s specification. • The light comes on briefly when the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position. • The light comes on when the parking brake is engaged with the ignition switch in “ON” position or ignition mode is “ON”. • The light comes on under either or both of above two conditions. The light also comes on when the fluid in the brake fluid reservoir falls below the specified level. The light should go out after starting the engine and fully releasing the parking brake, if the fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir is adequate. 2-36 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING The light also comes on together with the ABS warning light when the rear brake force control function (proportioning valve function) of the ABS system fails. If the brake system warning light (red color) comes on while you are driving the vehicle, it may mean that there is something wrong with the vehicle’s brake system. If this happens: 1) Pull off the road and stop carefully. WARNING Remember that stopping distance may be longer, you may have to push harder on the pedal, and the pedal may go down farther than normal. 2) Test the brakes by carefully starting and stopping the vehicle on the shoulder of the road. 3) If you determine that it is safe, drive the vehicle cautiously at low speed to the nearest a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop for repairs or tow the vehicle to the nearest a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop for repairs. WARNING If any of the following conditions occur, you should immediately ask your Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to inspect the brake system. • If the brake system warning light (red color) does not go out after the engine has been started and the parking brake has been fully released. • If the brake system warning light (red color) does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”. • If the brake system warning light (red color) comes on at any time during vehicle operation. NOTE: Because the brake system is self-adjusting, the fluid level will drop as the brake pads become worn. Replenishing the brake fluid reservoir is considered normal periodic maintenance. NOTE: Parking brake reminder buzzer A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind you to release the parking brake if you start the vehicle without releasing the parking brake. Check that the parking brake is fully released and the brake system warning light turns off. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light ABS 65D529 When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”, the light comes on briefly so you can check that the light is working. If the light stays on, or comes on when driving, there may be something wrong with the ABS. If this happens: 1) Pull off the road and stop carefully. 2) Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” or change the ignition mode to “LOCK”(OFF) by pressing the engine switch and then start the engine again. If the warning light comes on briefly then turns off, the system is normal. If the warning light still stays on, there is something wrong with the ABS system. If the ABS warning light and the brake system warning light (red color) stay on, or come on simultaneously when driving, your ABS system is equipped with the rear brake force control function (proportioning 2-37 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING valve function) and there may be something wrong with both the rear brake force control function and anti-lock function of the ABS system. If one of these happens, have the system inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop If the ABS becomes inoperative, the brake system will function as an ordinary brake system that does not have this ABS system. For details of ABS system, refer to “AntiLock Brake System (ABS)” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light Check the engine oil level and add oil if necessary. If there is enough oil, the lubrication system should be inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop before you drive the vehicle again. Driver’s seat belt reminder light / Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light NOTICE • If you operate the engine with this light on, severe engine damage can result. • Do not rely on the engine oil pressure warning light to indicate the need to add oil. Periodically check the engine oil level. Charge warning light 50G051 50G052 When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”, this light comes on. When the engine is started, the light goes out. The light will come on and remain on if there is insufficient oil pressure. If the light comes on when driving, pull off the road as soon as you can and stop the engine. When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”, this light comes on. When the engine is started, the light goes out. The light will come on and remain on if there is something wrong with the battery charging system. If the light comes on when the engine is running, the charging system should be inspected immediately by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. 60G049 When the driver or front passenger does not buckle his or her seat belt, this light will come on and/or blink. For details of the seat belt reminder, refer to “Seat belts and child restraint systems” section. 2-38 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING AIRBAG warning light Malfunction indicator light CAUTION 63J030 65D530 When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”, this light blinks or comes on for several seconds so you can check that the light is working. Your vehicle has a computer-controlled emission control system. A malfunction indicator light is provided on the instrument panel to indicate when it is necessary to have the emission control system serviced. When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”, this light comes on. When the engine is started, the light goes out. The light will come on and stay on if there is a problem in the airbag system or the seat belt pretensioner system. WARNING If AIR BAG light does not blink or come on briefly when the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”, stays on for more than 10 seconds, or comes on while driving, the air bag system or the seat belt pretensioner system may not work properly, which could result in serious injury in the event of a crash. Have both systems inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. If this light blinks, stop your vehicle immediately in a safe place to avoid catalyst’s melting problem since there may be a misfire in the engine. • Do not drive or stop over such as withered grasses. • Drive slowly if required to move the vehicle. NOTICE Continuing to drive the vehicle when the malfunction indicator light is on or blinking can cause permanent damage to the vehicle’s emission control system, and can affect fuel economy and driveability. If the malfunction indicator light comes on or blinks when the engine is running, there is a damage in the emission control system. Bring the vehicle to a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to have the damage fixed. Also, if this light comes on when the engine is running, there is a problem with the Auto Gear Shift system. Ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to have the system inspected. 2-39 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Transmission warning light (for Auto Gear Shift) Immobilizer system warning light 80J219 When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”, this light comes on for several seconds so you can check that the light is working. If this light comes on when the engine is running, there is a problem with the Auto Gear Shift system. Ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to have the system inspected. NOTE: If the Auto Gear Shift clutch temperature becomes too high, this light will blink. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the system cool down. Low fuel warning light 80JM122 54G343 When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”, the light comes on briefly so you can check that the light is working. If this light stays on or blinks, there is a problem with the system and the vehicle may not start. In such situations, have the vehicle inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop If this light comes on, fill the fuel tank immediately. Open door warning light NOTE: The activation point of this light varies depending on road conditions (for example, slope or curve) and driving conditions because of fuel moving in the tank. When this light comes on, a ding sounds once to remind you to fill the fuel. If you do not fill the fuel, a ding sounds every time when the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”.. 54G391 This light remains on until all doors (including the tailgate) are completely closed. If any door (including the tailgate) is open when the vehicle is moving, a ding sounds to remind you to close all doors completely. 2-40 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Electric power steering light However, repeating these operations could cause damage to the power steering system. NOTE: If the power steering system does not work properly, it will require greater effort to steer, but you still will be able to steer. 79J039 When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”, this light comes on. When the engine is started, the light goes out. If this light comes on while driving, the power steering system may not work properly. Have the system inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. NOTE: The following steering wheel operations may gradually take more effort while parking or driving at a very low speed. This is not a malfunction of the steering system, but the power steering control system limits the power assist in order to prevent it from overheating. • The steering wheel is operated very often. • The steering wheel is kept in a fully turned position for a long while. When the power steering control system cools down, the power steering system will return to its original condition. NOTE: If the steering is operated, you may hear noise caused by electric power steering operation. This is normal and indicates that the power steering system works properly. Engine coolant temperature warning light Low engine coolant temperature light (blue color) This light stays on while the engine is still cold and goes off when the engine has warmed up. If this light blinks, there is a problem with the system. Have your vehicle inspected by an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop. High engine coolant temperature warning light (red color) If this light blinks while driving, it means the engine is running hot. Avoid driving conditions that may lead to actual overheating. If the light stays on without blinking, then the engine is overheating. Follow the instructions in “Engine trouble: Overheating” of “EMERGENCY SERVICE” section. NOTICE 69RH179 Continuing to drive the vehicle when engine overheating is indicated can result in severe engine damage. When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”, this light comes on briefly so you can check that the light is working. This indicator has the following two following functions. 2-41 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) Ask your Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to inspect the system. Main beam (high beam) indicator light NOTE: If the security system (if equipped) indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, there may be something wrong with the system. Ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to inspect the system. Depress brake pedal indicator (for Auto Gear Shift) 82PH045 The front fog light indicator light comes on when the front fog light operates. 50G056 Turn signal indicators This indicator comes on when headlight main beams (high beams) are turned on. Security System (if equipped) indicator 50G055 When you turn on the left or right turn signals, the corresponding green arrow on the instrument cluster will flash along with the respective turn signal lights. When you turn on the hazard warning switch, both arrows will flash along with all of the turn signal lights. NOTE: If any abnormality of the turn signals is observed, such as fast blinking, there may be malfunction in the turn signal system. 76MH0A047 Refer to “Auto Gear Shift” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section for details. PUSH Indicator Light (if equipped) 82K269 For details about the security system (if equipped), refer to “security system (if equipped)” in this section. 82K174 If this light comes on when depressing the brake pedal for automatic transmission vehicles, or the clutch pedal for manual transmission vehicles, you can start the engine. 2-42 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING “ACC” Indicator Light (if equipped) Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller Battery Consumption Warning Light (if equipped) (Engine Auto Stop Start System)” in “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. ENG A-STOP OFF Light 82K097 This light comes on when the ignition mode is “ACC”. Ignition “ON” Indicator Light (if equipped) 70K122 If the remote controller becomes unreliable, this light comes on for several seconds when the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”. ENG A-STOP Indicator Light 56RM02036 When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”, this light comes on briefly if the system works properly. When you push the ENG A-STOP OFF switch, this light comes on. 82K098 This light comes on when the ignition mode is “ON” with the engine off. 72M00032 When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”, this light comes on briefly if the system works properly. If this light blinks when driving, there may be something wrong with the ENG ASTOP system. You should have the system inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. For details, refer to “ENG A-STOP System (Engine Auto Stop Start System)” in “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. When the engine is stopped by the “ENG ASTOP” system, this light comes on. For details, refer to “ENG A-STOP System 2-43 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Brake System Warning Light (amber color) (if equipped) Lighting control lever Steering lock indicator light (if equipped) EXAMPLE 82K170 56RH00247 When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”, this light comes on briefly so you can check that the light is working. If this light comes on, there may be a problem with the hill hold control system. Have your vehicle inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. If this light comes on, the steering lock is not disengaged. While lightly turning the steering wheel in both directions, press the engine switch again. For details, refer to “Hill Hold Control System” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. 65D611 WARNING To avoid possible injury, do not operate controls by reaching through the steering wheel. 2-44 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Lighting operation Light reminder buzzer EXAMPLE EXAMPLE The interior buzzer continuously beeps if you open the driver’s door without turning off the headlights and position lights. This function is triggered under the following condition: The headlights and/or position lights are on even after the ignition switch is turned off. (3) (2) The buzzer stops sounding when you turn off the headlights and position lights. (1) 66RH033 66RH032 To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob on the end of the lever. There are three positions: OFF(1) All lights are off. (2) Front position lights, tail lights, license plate light and instrument lights are on, but headlights are off. With the headlights on, push the lever forward to switch to the high beams (main beams) or pull the lever toward you to switch to the low beams. When the high beams (main beams) are on, a light on the instrument cluster will come on, to momentarily activate the high beams (main beams) as a passing signal, pull the lever slightly toward you and release it when you have completed the signal. (3) Front position lights, tail lights, license plate light, instrument lights and headlights are on. 2-45 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Front fog light switch (if equipped) Headlight leveling knob Vehicle Load Condition EXAMPLE (2) (1) 1 2 Switch Position 0 Driver + 1 passenger (in front seat) 0 Driver + 4 passengers, no cargo 1 Driver + 4 passengers, cargo added 1 Driver + full cargo 3 3 Driver only 4 66RH034 To turn the front fog light on, twist the knob as shown in the illustration with the position lights, tail lights and/or the headlights are on. When the front fog light is on, an indicator light on the instrument cluster will come on. EXAMPLE 81RM02029 Level the headlight beam according to the load condition of your vehicle by turning this knob. Turn the knob anticlockwise to lower the beam and clockwise to raise the beam. Align the marking (1) on the knob with the marking (2) provided on the dashboard for setting the required knob position. The chart below shows the appropriate knob position for different vehicle load conditions. 2-46 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Turn signal control lever Lane change signal Normal turn signal EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 66RH036 66RH035 65D611 WARNING To avoid possible injury, do not operate controls by reaching through the steering wheel. Turn signal operation With the ignition switch in “ON” position ot the ignition mode “ON”, move the lever upward or downward to activate the right or left turn signals. Move the lever all the way upward or downward to signal. When the turn is completed, the signal will cancel and the lever will return to its normal position. Move the lever partway in the direction to turn and hold it there. • The turn signal and its indicator flash while the lever is held at the moved position. The turn signal and its indicator flash 3 times even if you return the lever immediately after moving it. NOTE: The turn signal and its indicator can be set whether they flash 3 times after the turn signal lever is returned via the information display. Refer to “Information display” in this section. NOTE: You can customize the setting for the number of flashing times of the turn signal and its indicator (1 to 4 times). Please ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop for the customization. 2-47 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Hazard warning switch Windshield wiper and washer lever Type A EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 81RM02038 Type B 57L21128 EXAMPLE WARNING To avoid possible injury, do not operate controls by reaching through the steering wheel. Wiper and washer operation When the ignition switch is in “ON” position or the igniton mode is “ON”, you can use the wiper/washer lever. When the wipers are under heavy load such as covered by snow, the breaker will be activated and the wipers will stop operating to protect the wiper motor from overheating. If the wiper stops during operation, do the following methods. 1) Stop the vehicle in a safe place, and turn the engine off. 2) Move the wiper lever to “OFF” position. 3) Remove obstacles such as snow on the wipers. 4) After a while, when the temperature of the wiper motor becomes low enough, the breaker will be reset automatically and the wipers will be able to use. If you cannot use the wipers after a while, there may be another problem. Ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to have the wipers inspected. 81RM02041 Push in the hazard warning switch to activate the hazard warning lights. All turn signal lights and both turn signal indicators will flash simultaneously. To turn off the lights, push the switch again.Use the hazard warning lights to warn other drivers of possible risk of traffic hazard when you park your vehicle in case of emergency. 2-48 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Windshield wipers Windshield washer EXAMPLE NOTICE EXAMPLE MIST OFF INT LO HI 69RM02006 69RM02005 To turn the windshield wipers on, move the lever down to one of the three operating positions. In “INT” position, the wipers operate intermittently. The “INT” position is very convenient for driving in mist or light rain. In “LO” position, the wipers operate at a steady low speed. In “HI” position, the wipers operate at a steady high speed. To turn off the wipers, move the lever back to “OFF” position. To spray windshield washer fluid, pull the lever toward you. The windshield wipers will automatically turn on at low speed if they are not already on and your vehicle is equipped with “INT” position. Move the lever up and hold it to “MIST” position, the windshield wipers will turn on continuously at low speed. WARNING To help prevent damage to the windshield wiper and washer system components, you should take the following precautions: • Do not continue to hold in the lever when there is no windshield washer fluid being sprayed or the washer motor can be damaged. • Do not attempt to remove dirt from a dry windshield with the wipers or you can damage the windshield and the wiper blades. Always wet the windshield with washer fluid before operating the wipers. • Clear ice or packed snow from the wiper blades before using the wipers. • Check the washer fluid level regularly. Check it often when the weather is bad. • To prevent windshield icing in cold weather, turn on the defroster to heat the windshield before and during windshield washer use. • Do not use radiator antifreeze in the windshield washer reservoir. It can severely impair visibility when sprayed on the windshield, and can also damage your vehicle’s paint. 2-49 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Rear window wiper/washer switch (if equipped) Tilt steering lock lever (if equipped) WARNING Never attempt to adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving or you could lose control of the vehicle. EXAMPLE Washer (1) (2) Wiper 69RH171 To turn the rear wiper on, twist the rear wiper switch on the end of the lever forward to “ON” position. To turn the rear wiper off, twist the switch rearward to “OFF” position. With the rear wiper in “OFF” position, twist the switch rearward and hold it there to spray window washer fluid. With the rear wiper in “ON” position, turn the switch forward and hold it there to spray window washer fluid. NOTICE Clear ice or snow from the rear window and rear wiper blade before using the rear wiper. Accumulated ice or snow could prevent the wiper blade from moving, causing damage to the wiper motor. EXAMPLE 81RM02036 (1) LOCK (2) UNLOCK The lock lever is located under the steering column. To adjust the steering wheel height: 1) Push down the lock lever to unlock the steering column. 2) Adjust the steering wheel to the desired height and lock the steering column by pulling up the lock lever. 3) Try moving the steering wheel up and down to check that it is securely locked in position. 2-50 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Horn Heated rear window switch (if equipped) EXAMPLE EXAMPLE NOTE: • The defogger will work only when the engine is running. • The defogger will automatically turn off after the defogger remains on for 15 minutes to prevent discharging of the battery. (1) 69RH172 Press the horn button of the steering wheel to sound the horn. The horn will sound with the ignition switch in any position. 81RM02039 When the rear window is misted, push this switch (1) to clear the window. An indicator light will be lit when the defogger is on. The defogger will work only when the engine is running. To turn off the defogger, push the switch (1) again. NOTICE The heated rear window uses a large amount of electricity. Turn off the switch after the window has become clear. 2-51 81RM0-74E BEFORE DRIVING Vehicle loading Your vehicle was designed for specific weight capacities. The weight capacities of your vehicle are indicated by the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Permissible maximum Axle Weight (PAW, front and rear). The GVWR and PAW (front and rear) are listed in the “SPECIFICATIONS” section. GVWR – Maximum permissible overall weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all the occupants, accessories and cargo plus the trailer nose weight if towing a trailer). PAW (front and rear) – Maximum permissible weight on an individual axle. Actual weight of the loaded vehicle and actual loads at the front and rear axles can only be determined by weighing the vehicle. Compare these weights to the GVWR and PAW (front and rear). If the gross vehicle weight or the load on either axle exceeds these ratings, you must remove enough weight to bring the load down to the rated capacity. WARNING • Never overload your vehicle. The gross vehicle weight (sum of the weights of the vehicle, all the occupants, accessories, cargo plus trailer nose weight if towing a trailer) must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). In addition, never distribute a load so that the weight on either the front or rear axle exceeds the Permissible maximum Axle Weight (PAW). • Always distribute cargo evenly. To avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle, always secure cargo to prevent it from shifting if the vehicle moves suddenly. Place heavier objects on the floor and as far forward in the cargo area as possible. Never pile cargo higher than the top of the seat backs. Trailer towing Your vehicle was originally designed to carry people and a normal amount of cargo, not to tow a trailer. 2-52 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 60G408 Daily inspection checklist .................................................. 3-1 Engine oil consumption ..................................................... 3-2 Ignition switch (vehicle without Keyless Push Start System) .................. 3-2 3 Engine switch (vehicle with Keyless Push Start System) ....................... 3-4 Keyless push start system (if equipped) .......................... 3-5 Parking brake lever ............................................................. 3-8 Precaution for Parking......................................................... 3-10 Pedal ..................................................................................... 3-12 Starting Engine (Vehicle without Keyless Push Start System) ................... 3-13 Starting Engine (Vehicle with Keyless Push Start System)......................... 3-14 Using transmission ............................................................. 3-17 Gearshift indicator (if equipped) ........................................ 3-28 ENG A-STOP System (Engine Auto Stop Start System)........................................ 3-29 Parking sensors .................................................................. 3-35 Braking ................................................................................. 3-38 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Daily inspection checklist Before driving EXAMPLE 81RM03003 1) Check that windows, mirrors, lights and reflectors are clean and unobstructed. 2) Visually check the tires for the following points: – the depth of the tread groove – abnormal wear, cracks and damage – loose wheel nuts – existence of foreign material such as nails, stones, etc. Refer to “Tires” in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section for details. 3) Look for fluid and oil leakage. NOTE: It is normal for water to drip from the air conditioning system after use. 4) Check that the hood is fully closed and latched. 5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights, brake lights and horn for proper operation. 6) Adjust the seat. 7) Check the brake pedal and the parking brake lever. 8) Adjust the mirrors. 9) Check that you and all passengers have properly fastened your seat belts. 10)Check that all warning lights come on as the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON. 11)Check all gauges. 12)Check that the brake system warning light turns off when the parking brake is released. Once a week, or each time you fill your fuel tank or before a long distance driving (like highway driving), perform the following under-hood checks: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Engine oil level Coolant level Brake fluid level Battery fluid (acid) level Windshield washer fluid level Hood latch operation Pull the hood release handle inside the vehicle. Check that you cannot open the hood all the way without releasing the secondary latch. Close the hood securely after checking for proper latch operation. See the item “All latches, hinges and locks” of “Chassis, body and others” in “Maintenance schedule” in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section for lubrication schedule. WARNING Check that the hood is fully closed and latched before driving. If it is not, it can fly up unexpectedly during driving, obstructing your view and resulting in an accident. Once a month, or each time you fill your fuel tank, check the tire pressure using a tire pressure gauge. Also check the tire pressure of the spare tire. 3-1 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Engine oil consumption It is normal for the engine to consume some engine oil during normal vehicle operation. The amount of engine oil consumption depends on viscosity and quality of the oil and your driving conditions. More oil is consumed during high-speed driving and when there is frequent acceleration and deceleration. Under high loads, your engine also will consume more oil. A new engine also consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls have not yet become conditioned. New engines reach the normal level of oil consumption only after approximately 5000 km driving. Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km When judging the amount of oil consumption, note that the oil may become diluted and it is difficult to judge the accurate oil level. As an example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips, and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km or more of driving. This is because the oil gradually becomes diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not changed. You should also be aware that the diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is subsequently driven at high speeds, such as on an expressway, making it appear that oil is excessively consumed after high-speed driving. Ignition switch (vehicle without Keyless Push Start System) EXAMPLE 65D611 WARNING To avoid possible injury, do not operate controls by reaching through the steering wheel. 3-2 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE EXAMPLE ACC Accessories such as the radio can operate, but the engine is off. EXAMPLE Push LOC K AC C Turn to “LOCK” START This is the position for starting the engine using the starter motor. The key should be released from this position as soon as the engine starts. 68PH00310 60G033 The ignition switch has the following four positions: You must push in the key to turn it to “LOCK” position. It locks the ignition, and prevents normal use of the steering wheel after the key is removed. LOCK This is the normal parking position. It is the only position in which the key can be removed. ON This is the normal operating position. All electrical systems are on. Ignition key reminder A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind you to remove the ignition key if it is in the ignition switch when the driver’s door is opened. To release the steering lock, insert the key and turn it clockwise to one of the other positions. If you have trouble turning the key to unlock the steering, try turning the steering wheel slightly to the right or left while turning the key. 3-3 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE EXAMPLE WARNING 81RM03004 WARNING • Never return the ignition switch to “LOCK” position and remove the ignition key while the vehicle is moving. The steering wheel will lock and you will not be able to steer the vehicle. (Continued) (Continued) • Always return the ignition switch to “LOCK” position and remove the ignition key when leaving the vehicle even only for a short time. Also do not leave children alone in a parked vehicle. Unattended children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the transmission into neutral, which could result in an accident. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the power windows or other moving features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children. NOTICE • Do not leave the ignition switch in “ON” position if the engine is not running as the battery will discharge. Engine switch (vehicle with keyless push start system) EXAMPLE 81RM03005 LOCK (OFF) This mode is for parking the vehicle. When this mode is selected by pressing the engine switch and then any door (including the tailgate) is opened or closed, the steering will be locked automatically. ACC Press the engine switch to select this ignition mode to use such electric equipment as the audio system, outside rearview mirrors and accessory socket with the engine off. When this position is selected, the “ACC” indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on. Refer to “Warning and indicator lights” in “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details. 3-4 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE ON • With the engine off You can use such electric equipment as the power windows and wipers with the engine off. When this ignition mode is selected by pressing the engine switch, the ignition “ON” indicator light in the instrument cluster will come on. • With the engine on All electric equipment is operational. The vehicle can be driven when you have selected this ignition mode by pressing the engine switch. START Manual transmission – Provided you have the keyless push start system remote controller with you, the engine automatically starts when you press the engine switch to select this ignition mode after shifting to “N” (Neutral) and depressing the brake and clutch pedals. Auto Gear Shift – Provided you have the keyless push start system remote controller with you, the engine automatically starts when you press the engine switch to select this ignition mode after placing the gearshift lever in “N” (Neutral) position and depressing the brake pedal. NOTE: You do not need to keep the engine switch pressed to until the engine start. NOTICE Do not leave the engine switch in “ACC” or “ON” mode when the engine is not running. Avoid using the radio or other electric accessories for a long time when the engine switch is in “ACC” or “ON” mode when the engine is not running, otherwise the battery may discharge. NOTE: • The steering lock may not be released and the steering lock indicator light turns on if some load is acting on the steering wheel. If this happens, turn the steering wheel to the right or left to relieve it from the load before you press the engine switch again to change to the desired ignition mode. • In the presence of strong radio wave or noise, you may not be able to change the ignition mode to “ACC” or “ON” or to start the engine using the engine switch. Keyless push start system (if equipped) Provided the keyless push start system remote controller is within the “interior workable area” (refer to the related explanation in this section), you can use the engine switch for starting the engine and selecting an ignition mode (“ACC” or “ON”). In addition, the following functions can be used: • Keyless entry function. Refer to “Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller / Keyless Entry System Transmitter (if equipped)” in “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details. • Locking and unlocking doors using a request switch. Refer to “Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller / Keyless Entry System Transmitter (if equipped)” in “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details. • Immobilizer (anti-theft) function. Refer to “Immobilizer system” in “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details. Engine switch illumination The engine switch is illuminated (lit) in the following situations: • When the engine is off and the driver’s door is open, or for 15 seconds after the driver’s door is closed. The illumination will fade out after 15 seconds passed. • When the engine is off and the position lights are on. The illumination will go out when the position lights are turned off. 3-5 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE • When the engine is on and the position lights and/or the headlights are on. The illumination will go out when the position lights and the headlights are turned off. EXAMPLE Selection of ignition modes Press the engine switch to select “ACC” or “ON” mode as follows when you use an electric accessory or check the operation of instruments without running the engine. 1) Bring the keyless push start system remote controller with you and sit in the driver’s seat. 2) Manual transmission – Without depressing the clutch pedal, press the engine switch (1). 82K253 NOTE: To save the battery, the illumination will be automatically turned off when both of the following conditions are simultaneously met: • The headlights and position lights are turned off. • 15 minutes has elapsed since opening the driver’s door. Auto Gear Shift – Without depressing the brake pedal, press the engine switch (1). EXAMPLE (OFF) (Audio equipment) EXAMPLE 68PH00322 If the “PUSH” indicator light blinks and the ignition modes cannot be selected Your keyless push start system remote controller may not be sensed as being within the interior workable area (refer to the related explanation in this section). Try again after checking that you have the remote controller with you. If the ignition modes still cannot be selected, the battery of the remote controller may be discharged. To select an ignition mode, you must then use the following method: EXAMPLE (1) (1) 82K254 Every time you press the engine switch, the ignition mode changes as follows. (2) 55RM03005 3-6 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 1) Manual transmission – Without depressing the clutch pedal, push the engine switch (1). Auto Gear Shift – Without depressing the brake pedal, press the engine switch (1). 2) Within about 10 seconds during which the “PUSH” indicator light in the instrument cluster is blinking, touch the engine switch with the lock switch end of the remote controller (2) for about 2 seconds. NOTE: • If you still cannot select the ignition modes, there may be some problem with the keyless push start system. Contact an Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for an inspection of the system. • The immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light will come on for about 5 seconds while the “PUSH” indicator light is blinking. Refer to “Warning and indicator lights” in “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details. • You may customize the system to cause the interior buzzer to sound once for warning that remote controller is out of sensing range. To incorporate this customization, please contact an Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop. • If the battery of the remote controller is becoming discharged, the keyless push start system remote controller battery consumption warning indicator in the information display will come on for a few seconds when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “ON”. Refer to “Warning and indicator lights” in “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details. For details on replacing the battery, refer to “Keyless push start system remote controller / keyless entry system transmitter (if equipped)” in “BEFORE DRIVING” section. “Remote Controller Outside” Warning When either of the conditions described below is met, the system causes a “Remote Controller Outside” warning by sounding the interior and exterior buzzers. At the same time, the immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light comes on. • Any door is opened and then closed while the remote controller is not inside the vehicle and the engine is running or the ignition mode has been changed to “ACC” or “ON” by pressing the engine switch. • The remote controller is not inside the vehicle when you attempt to start the engine after changing the ignition mode to “ACC” or “ON” by pressing the engine switch. (1) EXAMPLE 81RM03006 (1) Immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light (blinks) NOTE: • If the warning is given, relocate the remote controller as soon as possible. • Any attempt to start the engine will fail while the warning is active. Blinking of the immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light in the instrument cluster will also indicate this condition. Refer to “Warning and indicator lights” in “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details. • Normally, the immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light should go out shortly after the remote controller is brought back inside the vehicle. If they remain lit and blinking, change the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) by pressing the engine switch and then perform the engine starting operation. Refer to “Start 3-7 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE -ing engine (vehicle with keyless push start system) (if equipped)” in this section. • Always keep the remote controller with you as the driver. Interior workable area for keyless push start system EXAMPLE (1) 81RM03001 (1) Interior workable area The interior workable area is defined as all the interior spaces except for the space above the instrument panel. NOTE: • Even when the remote controller is in the interior workable area, if it is in any of the following conditions, you may not be able to start the engine or select the ignition modes, and the “Remote Controller Outside” warning may be given. –The remote controller’s battery is low. –The remote controller is affected by strong radio wave or noise. –The remote controller is in contact with or covered by a metallic object. –The remote controller is in the secluded stowage such as the glove box or a door pocket. –The remote controller is in the sun visor pocket or on the floor. • Even when the remote controller is outside the interior workable area, if it is in any of the following conditions, you may be able to start the engine or select the ignition mode. The Remote Controller Outside warning may not be given at that time. –The remote controller is outside the vehicle but very close to a door. –The remote controller is in certain area on the instrument panel. Parking brake lever EXAMPLE (1) (2) (3) 54G039 (1) To set (2) To release (3) To release The parking brake lever is located between the seats. To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down and pull the parking brake lever all the way up. To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down, pull up slightly on the parking brake lever, push the button on the end of the lever with your thumb, and lower the lever to its original position. 3-8 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING • Never drive your vehicle with the parking brake on: rear brake effectiveness can be reduced from overheating, brake life may be shortened, or permanent brake damage may result. • If the parking brake does not hold the vehicle securely or does not fully release, have your vehicle inspected immediately by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. • When parking on an uphill, turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels point to the center of the road. • When parking on a downhill, turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels point to the curb. (Continued) WARNING (Continued) • Always set the parking brake fully before leaving your vehicle or it may move, causing injury or damage. When parking, check that the gearshift lever is in one of the following positions; – 1st gear or “R” (Reverse) for manual transmission vehicles. – “D”, “M” or “R” for Auto Gear Shift vehicles. Also, check the instrument cluster to make sure that the transmission is engaged in “1” or “R” position. Remember, even though the transmission is in gear, you must set the parking brake fully. WARNING When parking the vehicle in extremely cold weather, the following procedure should be used: 1) Set the parking brake. 2) Manual transmission – turn off the engine, then shift into reverse or first gear. Auto Gear Shift – shift into “D”, “M” or “R” and check the gear position indicator in the instrument cluster to make sure that the transmission is engaged in “1” or “R” position, then turn off the engine. 3) Get out of the vehicle and put chocks under the wheels. 4) Release the parking brake. When you return to your vehicle, first set the parking brake, and then remove the wheel chocks. CAUTION The hill hold control system will not activate while the parking brake is engaged. NOTE: (For Auto Gear Shift models) For details on how to use the gearshift lever to park the vehicle, refer to “Parking” in “Auto Gear Shift” in this section. 3-9 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Parking brake reminder buzzer A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind you to release the parking brake if you start the vehicle without releasing the parking brake. Check that the parking brake is fully released and the brake system warning light turns off. Precaution for Parking When Taking a Nap in the Vehicle With the Engine Running, the Cooling Fan (Radiator Fan) may Rotate Suddenly EXAMPLE The cooling fan (radiator fan) in the engine compartment may automatically stop and rotate depending on the conditions of the engine coolant temperature. WARNING If you get close to a rotating cooling fan (radiator fan), your hands, hair and clothing may get caught in it, resulting in personal injury. With the engine running, even when the cooling fan (radiator fan) stops, it may automatically rotate. Therefore, do not get close to the cooling fan (radiator fan). When Moving the Vehicle When moving the vehicle, start the engine. WARNING If you coast with the engine off, stronger force than normal is required when turning the steering wheel or depressing the brake pedal, resulting in an accident. Do not coast on a downhill slope with the engine off. 69RHS172 Do not take a nap in the vehicle with the engine running. WARNING • Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle due to surrounding conditions and wind direction, possibly causing carbon monoxide poisoning. • The gearshift lever could change unintentionally, or the accelerator pedal could be depressed accidentally, causing an accident. • If you were to accidentally step on the accelerator pedal while you are asleep, the engine and the exhaust system could overheat, resulting in danger of fire. 3-10 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE When You Park the Vehicle Outside on a Snowy Day WARNING • When you park the vehicle under the eaves or the trees, fallen snow may hit the vehicle's roof and it may be dented. Do not park the vehicle under the eaves or the trees on a snowy day. • If you park the vehicle outside on a snowy day, the wiper arms may be deformed and the wiper blades may be frozen on the windshield, because of the weight of snow. When you park the vehicle outside, raise the wiper arms. Do not Park the Vehicle Near Flammable Materials When Leaving the Vehicle, Stop the Engine and Lock Doors EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 69RHS054 69RHS174 WARNING If you park the vehicle near flammable materials, the exhaust pipes and exhaust gas will get hot, resulting in danger of fire. Do not park the vehicle near flammable materials such as dry grass, paper waste and plywood. Even when leaving the vehicle for a short time, do not leave cash or valuables inside, as there is a risk of theft. WARNING If you leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running, problems such as fire or theft can occur. Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running. 3-11 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Do not Leave the Computer and the Mobile Phone in the Vehicle There is the possibility of theft, or these items could become damaged due to moisture, humidity or temperature change. Do not Leave Lighters and Eyeglasses in the Vehicle EXAMPLE 69RHS175 Pedal WARNING • As the inside of the vehicle becomes hotter when parking in areas where strong sunlight causes increased temperature, there is the danger of spontaneous ignition of lighters or spray cans, fire due to explosion, the deformation or cracking of eyeglasses, plastic cards or CD cases, or the rupture of carbonated beverage cans. When parking in those areas, do not leave lighters, spray cans, plastic products (eyeglasses, plastic cards, CD cases, etc.) or carbonated beverage cans in the vehicle. • When items get pushed around or when the seats are moved, it is possible that gas could escape and lead to a fire. Do not place accessories such lighters or spray cans with exposed operating parts in the glove box, in storage compartments, between the seats, on the floor, etc. Manual transmission EXAMPLE (1) (2) (3) 80J2121 Auto Gear Shift EXAMPLE (2) (3) 80J2122 3-12 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Clutch pedal (1) A clutch pedal is used to disengage the drive to the wheels when starting the engine, stopping, or shifting the gearshift lever. Depressing the pedal disengages the clutch. WARNING Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. It could result in excessive clutch wear, clutch damage, or unexpected loss of engine braking. Brake pedal (2) WARNING • If brake squeal is excessive and occurs each time the brakes are applied, you should have the brakes checked by Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. • Do not apply brakes continuously or rest your foot on the brake pedal. This will result in overheating of the brakes which could cause unpredictable braking action, longer stopping distances, or permanent brake damage. Your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle is equipped with front disc brakes and rear drum brakes. Depressing a brake pedal applies both sets of brakes. Accelerator pedal (3) You may hear occasional brake squeal when you apply the brakes. This is a normal condition caused by environmental factors such as temperature, humidity, snow or dust, etc NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with Brake Override System. If you depress both the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal simultaneously, the engine power output may be suppressed. Auto gear shift - You may hear occasional sound when you release brake pedal while vehicle is in “D” (Drive) mode and about to move. This is a normal phenomenon. Starting engine (Vehicle Without Keyless Push Start System) Before starting engine EXAMPLE MT AGS An accelerator pedal controls the speed of the engine. Depressing the accelerator pedal increases power output and speed. 81RM03007 1) Check that the parking brake is set fully. 2) Manual transmission – Shift into “N” (Neutral) and depress the clutch pedal all the way to the floor. Hold the clutch pedal while starting the engine. Auto Gear Shift – Shift into “N” (Neutral) and depress the brake pedal. Hold the brake pedal while starting the engine. NOTE: For Auto Gear Shift vehicles, if the engine cannot be started, make sure the gearshift lever is in “N” before restarting the engine. 3-13 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Check that the parking brake is set fully and the transmission is in Neutral before attempting to start the engine. For Manual transmission - Engine can be started only after depressing the clutch pedal. However, before depressing the clutch pedal make sure that the transmission is in Neutral and brake pedal is depressed. Starting a cold and warm engine With your foot taken off the accelerator pedal, crank the engine by turning the ignition key to “START”. Release the key when the engine starts. Starting engine (vehicle with keyless push start system) Before starting engine EXAMPLE MT (1) 82K254 3) The “PUSH” indicator light in the instrument cluster will come on. Push the engine switch (1). When the engine is started, the starter motor will automatically stop. AGS WARNING NOTICE • Release the key immediately after the engine has started or the starter can be damaged. • For protection of a lead-acid battery and a starter motor, do not use the starter motor by turning the key to “START” for more than 12 seconds at a time. If the engine dose not start, turn the key to “LOCK” position and wait for more than 30 seconds before trying again. If the engine does not start after several attempts, consult a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop EXAMPLE 81RM03008 1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully. 2) Manual transmission – Shift into “N” (Neutral) and fully depress the clutch pedal. Hold the clutch and brake pedals fully depressed. Auto Gear Shift – Shift into “N” (Neutral) and depress the brake pedal. Hold the brake pedal while starting the engine. Make sure that the parking brake is set fully and the transmission is in Neutral before attempting to start the engine. 3-14 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE NOTICE • Do not depress the accelerator during the engine starting procedure. • If the engine does not respond when you try to start it with the engine switch or if the engine switch repeats cycling through “LOCK” (OFF) - “ACC” - “ON” mode, the vehicle battery may be discharged. Check the voltage of the vehicle battery before trying again. NOTE: • You do not need to keep the engine switch pressed to start the engine. • The engine of a manual transmission vehicle will not start unless the clutch pedal is depressed. • For Auto Gear Shift vehicles, if the engine cannot be started, make sure the gearshift lever is in “N” before restarting the engine. • You should turn off such loads as the headlights and air conditioning system to facilitate starting of the engine. • If the engine starts, the starter motor will stop turning automatically. • Even if the engine does not start, the starter motor will stop turning automatically after a short time. After the starter morter has stopped automatically, press the engine switch to select LOCK(OFF) mode and wait for more than 30 seconds before trying again. If there is some problem with the system, the engine does not start automatically. In this case, continue pressing the engine switch for a while (up to 12 seconds) until engine starts. Stopping engine • Depress the engine switch to stop the engine after the vehicle stopped completely. • In case of emergency, you can stop the engine by quickly pushing the engine switch more than 3 times, or pushing and holding the engine switch for more than 2 seconds while the vehicle is in motion. NOTE: Except in cases of emergency, do not stop the engine while the vehicle is in motion. The steering and braking operation will require more effort when the engine is stopped. Refer to “Braking” in this section. • If the engine remains stopped for while after it was stopped unexpectedly or was raced before stopping, a clicking sound may be heard from around the engine when it is restarted. This is not a malfunction. Always let the engine idle before stopping it. Starting a cold and warm engine With your foot taken off the accelerator pedal, crank the engine by pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “START”. NOTICE Release your finger from engine switch immediately after the engine has started or the starter system can be damaged. For protection of a lead-acid battery and a starter motor, if the engine does not start, press the engine switch to select LOCK (OFF) mode and wait for more than 30 seconds before trying again. If the engine does not start after several attempts, consult a Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop. NOTE: For Auto Gear Shift vehicles: If the engine cannot be started, make sure the gearshift lever is in "N" before restarting the engine. 3-15 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE If the “PUSH” indicator light blinks and the engine cannot be started Your keyless push start system remote controller may not be sensed as being within the interior workable area. Try again after checking that you have the remote controller with you. If the engine still cannot be started, the battery of the remote controller may be discharged. You must then use the following method to be able to start the engine. EXAMPLE (1) (2) 55RM03008 1) Make sure that the parking brake is set fully. 2) Manual transmission – Shift into “N” (Neutral). Hold the clutch and brake pedals fully depressed. Auto Gear Shift – Shift into “N” (Neutral) and fully depress the brake pedal. Hold the brake pedal fully depressed. 3) The “PUSH” indicator light in the instrument cluster will come on. Press the engine switch (1). 4) Within about 10 seconds of blinking of the “PUSH” indicator light in the instrument cluster, touch the engine switch with the lock switch end of the remote controller (2) for about 2 seconds. NOTE: • If you still cannot start the engine after several attempts using the above method, there may be a problem elsewhere, such as a low battery. Contact an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for inspection. • The immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light will come on for about 5 seconds while the “PUSH” indicator light is blinking. • You may customize the system to cause the interior buzzer to sound once for warning that remote controller is out of sensing range. Please contact an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for the customization. • If the battery of the remote controller is about to become completely discharged, the keyless push start system remote controller battery consumption indicator in the information display will come on for a few seconds when the ignition mode is changed to “ON” by pressing the engine switch. For details on replacing the battery, refer to “Keyless push start system remote controller / keyless entry system transmitter (if equipped)” in “BEFORE DRIVING” section. Returning the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) NOTE: Certain problems like a fault in engine system may prevent the engine switch from going back to “LOCK” (OFF) mode. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by an Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop after doing the following: • Lock the doors using the key to prevent theft. (The request switches and the keyless push start system remote controller cannot be used to lock them.) • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery to prevent discharge. “LOCK” (OFF) mode reminder buzzer • If the driver’s door is opened without returning the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) by pressing the engine switch, a buzzer sounds to warn you of this condition. • If you open the driver’s door after pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “ACC”, the interior buzzer beeps intermittently. • The buzzer will stop sounding if you then push the engine switch twice, thus bringing it back the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF). 3-16 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Whenever you leave the vehicle, check that you have returned the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) using the engine switch and then lock the doors. Without returning the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF), you cannot use a request switch or keyless push start system remote controller to lock the doors. Steering lock warning buzzer If the steering lock fails to engage due to a fault in the system when the ignition mode is turned to “LOCK” (OFF) by pressing the engine switch and then any door is opened or closed, the interior buzzer will warn you of this condition with repeated short beeps. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by an Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop. Using transmission WARNING Do not hang any items on the gearshift lever and do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest. Otherwise, it could prevent proper operation of the gearshift lever and cause its malfunction, resulting in an accident. Manual transmission Starting off To start off, depress the clutch pedal all the way to the floor and shift into 1st gear. After releasing the parking brake, gradually release the clutch. When you hear a change in the engine’s sound, slowly press the accelerator while continuing to gradually release the clutch. Shifting All forward gears are synchronized and provide quiet and easy shifting. Always depress the clutch pedal all the way to the floor before shifting gears. Keep the engine speed from rising into the red zone of the tachometer (if equipped). EXAMPLE 69RH016 3-17 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Downshifting maximum allowable speeds Downshifting km/h 2nd to 1st 20 3rd to 2nd 75 4th to 3rd 115 5th to 4th 160* *NOTE: You may not accelerate to the maximum allowable speed because of the driving situation and/or the vehicle condition. NOTICE Do not downshift to a lower gear at the speed faster than the maximum allowable speeds for the next lower speed, or severe damage to engine and transmission can result. WARNING • Reduce your speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a long or steep hill. A lower gear will allow the engine to provide braking. Avoid riding the brakes or they may overheat, resulting in brake failure. • When driving on slippery roads, slow down before downshifting. Excessive and/or sudden changes in engine speed may cause loss of traction, which could cause you to lose control. NOTICE • Check that the vehicle is completely stationary before you shift into reverse. • To help avoid clutch damage, do not use the clutch pedal as a footrest while driving or use the clutch to keep the vehicle stationary on a slope. Depress the clutch fully when shifting. • When shifting or starting off, do not race the engine. Racing the engine can shorten engine life and cause negative effect to smooth shifting. NOTICE Before engaging reverse gear “R”, check that the vehicle is completely stationary and gear lever is in neutral “N” position. After depressing clutch pedal fully, shift to “R”. If it is difficult to engage reverse gear “R”, follow below procedure:1) Put gear lever in neutral “N”. 2) Release the clutch pedal once. 3) Again depress the clutch pedal, and shift from “N” to “R”. 3-18 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Auto Gear Shift Auto Gear Shift is a 5-speed forward/ reverse transmission. Auto Gear Shift has the basic features of conventional manual transmission, but clutch operation and transmission gear shifting are controlled electronically. The features are as follows: Depress brake pedal indicator EXAMPLE NOTICE 76MH0A047 Do not depress both the brake pedal and accelerator pedal simultaneously. This can cause damage or overheating to the clutch. NOTE: When you open the driver’s door, the Auto Gear Shift systems run automatically and you may hear an operating noise. This sound does not indicate malfunction. 81RM03009 EXAMPLE This light will come on if you do not depress the brake pedal in the following situations. • When starting the engine. • When the engine is on and the gearshift lever is shifted from “N” position to “D”, “M” or “R” position. • When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position or the ignition mode is “ON”, and the engine is off, the gearshift lever is shifted into any position. This light will also come on if one of the gears cannot be engaged and the system is unable to re-try shifting when you shift the gearshift lever from “N” position to “D”, “M” or “R” position. 81RM03010 3-19 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Starting the engine When starting the engine, always place the gearshift lever in the “N” position and depress the brake pedal firmly. The engine cannot be started unless the gearshift lever is in the “N” position and the brake pedal is depressed. If you parked vehicle with gear engaged on last time (if you can see “1” or “R”), shift into “N” (Neutral) and depress the brake pedal. Hold the brake pedal while starting the engine. You can hear buzzer in short time. EXAMPLE 76MH0A056 CAUTION • For the vehicles with the keyless push start system, if you cannot press the engine switch firmly, the engine may not start. Even if you shift the gearshift lever into "R" or "D" position without the engine running, the vehicle does not move. • If you try to move your vehicle under the above-mentioned condition, the vehicle may move in unexpected directions on a slope, etc. • This may cause an accident. • When starting engine, press engine switch firmly. Also, make sure that the engine is running by checking engine sound or warning and indicator lights. NOTE: • If you start the engine without the gearshift lever in the “N” position, the gear position indicator in the instrument cluster will blink. • For vehicles with Eng A-STOP system, if the engine restarts automatically, the gear position indicator in instrument cluster may display "N" temporarily. This is a normal phenomenon. Clutch operation You can select either the Drive (D) mode, the Manual (M) mode or the Reverse (R) mode. Since this vehicle controls clutch operation electronically in either mode, you do not need to operate the clutch. Creeping function This vehicle has a creeping function that helps the vehicle to start smoothly by engaging the clutch. When the gearshift lever is in any of the positions “D”, “M” or “R”, and you release your foot from the brake pedal, the vehicle starts slowly without depressing the accelerator pedal. However, creep is not possible in manual (M) mode with 2nd gear engaged. The creeping function is disabled if you depress the brake pedal or pull up the parking brake lever. NOTE: If the driver’s door is opened and/or the parking brake lever is engaged with the gear in the “M”, “D” or “R” position, the creeping function will not operate. Parking and Stopping the vehicle Auto Gear Shift does not have a parking position. Park the vehicle with a gear engaged. Make sure that the gearshift lever is “D”, “M”, or “R”. Also, check the instrument cluster to make sure that the transmission is engaged in “1” or “R” position. 3-20 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE NOTICE A buzzer will sound continuously if the vehicle is operated with the gearshift lever in-between of each shift positions. The vehicle will become inoperative if you continue to operate the vehicle with the gearshift lever inbetween shift positions. Drive (D) mode When the Drive (D) mode is activated, the most appropriate gear position is automatically selected upon operation of the accelerator pedal and variation of vehicle speed. Normal driving: 1) Start the engine as instructed in “Starting the engine” in this section. 2) With your foot on the brake pedal, shift the gearshift lever to the “D” position. When the gearshift lever is shifted to the “D” position, the gear will be shifted to 1st. warning buzzer (long pulse sound) will sound if any of the following cases occur; – If you shift the gearshift lever from the “N” to the “D” position without depressing the brake pedal – If the system is unable to re-try shifting You should depress the brake pedal and shift the gearshift lever to “N” position, then shift to “D” again. 3) Release the parking brake and brake pedal. 4) Depress the accelerator pedal slowly. WARNING EXAMPLE 76MH0A057 NOTE: • If 1st gear cannot be engaged even though the gearshift lever has been shifted from the “N” to the “D” position, the system will re-try shifting automatically. This will take some time, noise may be heard from the gears, and shifting gear shock may occur. However, they do not indicate malfunction. • The “N” indicator will flash, the depress brake pedal indicator will come on and a • While driving the vehicle, do not shift the gearshift lever to the “N” position. The engine brake may not work and you may get involved in an accident. If you return the gearshift lever from “N” to “D” because of unintended shifting, the gear position will be shifted according to the current vehicle speed. • Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This operation prevents the vehicle from moving due to unintended activation of the creeping function. 3-21 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE NOTICE • If the gearshift lever cannot shift into any position, or the gear is changed to “N” position automatically when the vehicle speed becomes less than 10 km/h, there may be a systematic malfunction. In this case, ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to inspect the Auto Gear Shift system as soon as possible. • Do not operate the system as described below. The life cycle of the clutch may be reduced. – Using the accelerator pedal to hold the vehicle on an uphill slope with the gearshift lever in the “D” or “M” position. If you perform this operation for a certain period of time, a warning buzzer will sound. – Shifting the gearshift lever to the “D”, “M” or “R” position while racing the engine. – Driving at low speed using a high gear. – Holding the vehicle on an uphill slope using the creeping function. If you perform this operation for a certain period of time, a warning buzzer will sound. Starting off on an uphill/downhill: CAUTION The hill hold control system will not activate while the parking brake is engaged. Uphill 1) Apply the parking brake firmly so that the vehicle does not roll backwards. 2) Shift the gearshift lever to the “D” position while depressing the brake pedal. Make sure that the gear position indicator in the instrumental cluster displays 1st gear. 3) Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator pedal gradually, and when the vehicle starts to move, release the parking brake and depress the accelerator pedal to start off. NOTICE On an uphill slope, never hold the vehicle at a stop using only the accelerator pedal or the creeping function. If you perform this operation for a certain period of time, a warning buzzer will sound, and in some cases the engine will stall. This can also cause excessive damage to the clutch. Downhill 1) Depress the brake pedal and shift the gearshift lever to the “D” position. Make sure that the gear is in 1st by checking the gear position indicator. 2) Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator pedal slowly. Even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed, the clutch will be engaged when the vehicle speed increases. Using engine braking: When driving on a downhill slope, downshifting is recommended. So you can use engine braking. By placing the gearshift lever in the “M” position, the Manual (M) mode is selected, and you can shift to a lower gear manually. For details of downshift operation, refer to “Upshift and downshift” in the “Manual (M) mode”. Manual (M) mode The gears are not shifted automatically. To shift the transmission, the driver must operate the gearshift lever to the “+” or “–” direction. As for conventional manual transmission vehicles, releasing the accelerator pedal a little may help the transmission to shift smoothly. 3-22 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Upshift and downshift: the transmission is engaged in 1st or reverse, then depress the accelerator pedal. It is possible to start vehicle in 2nd gear using manual mode, from stop condition. Downshifting EXAMPLE Upshifting EXAMPLE 81RM03012 81RM03011 Pull the gearshift lever to the “+” direction and release it. Every time the lever is operated, the transmission is upshifting 1 step in the order of 1st  2nd  3rd  4th  5th gear. Push the gearshift lever to the “–” direction and release it. Every time the lever is operated, the transmission is downshifted in the order 5th  4th  3rd  2nd  1st gear. EXAMPLE NOTE: • Always use 1st gear while starting off on an uphill slope otherwise you can damage the clutch. • To downshift smoothly, the engine runs fast in some cases. This is done intentionally by the system and is not a malfunction. • When driving down a hill, downshift and use the engine braking appropriately. If necessary, continuous downshifting is possible. However, if downshifting more than 3 steps, gear shifting will take more time. • When the gear is shifting, a noise can be heard in some case. This is not a malfunction. EXAMPLE 76MH0A061 76MH0A059 The gear position is displayed on the gear position indicator. The gear position indicator shows the transmission gear position. Before starting off, always make sure that 3-23 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING • Be careful when accelerating, upshifting, downshifting or braking on a slippery surface. Sudden acceleration or engine braking could cause the vehicle to spin or skid. While starting off on a slippery or snowy roads, please use 2nd gear.(if required) • To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed and downshift. Remember, if you ride the brakes excessively, they may overheat and fail. • While driving the vehicle, do not shift the gearshift lever to “N” position. The engine brake may not work and you may get involved in an accident. If you return the gearshift lever from “N” to “M” because of unintended shifting, the gear position will be shifted according to the current vehicle speed. • Do not apply the parking brake while driving. Otherwise, it could cause a skid and you may get involved in an accident. NOTICE • If the gearshift lever cannot shift into any position, or the gear is changed to “N” position automatically when the vehicle speed becomes less than 10 km/h, there may be a systematic malfunction. In this case, ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to inspect the Auto Gear Shift system as soon as possible. • The manual (M) mode does not upshift even if the engine speed reaches the rev-limit. • The system will not allow shifting up or down to a gear that would cause engine over-revving or under-revving. • If frequently driving at low speed using a high gear position, the life cycle of the clutch may be reduced. • Frequent downshifting (more than 3 positions consecutively) causes the reduction of transmission life. Starting off: 1) Start the engine as instructed in “Starting the engine” in this section. 2) With your foot on the brake pedal, shift the gearshift lever to the “M” position. When the gearshift lever is shifted to the “M” position, the gear will be shifted to 1st. Before starting off, always make sure that the intended gear is engaged by checking the gear position indicator, then depress the accelerator pedal. NOTE: • If 1st gear cannot be engaged even though the gearshift lever has been shifted from the “N” to the “M” position, the system will re-try shifting automatically. This will take some time, noise may be heard from the gears, and shifting gear shock may occur. However, they do not indicate malfunction. • The “N” indicator will flash, the depress brake pedal indicator will come on and a warning buzzer (long pulse sound) will sound if any of the following cases occur; – If you shift the gearshift lever from the “N” to the “M” position without depressing the brake pedal – If the system is unable to re-try shifting You should depress the brake pedal and shift the gearshift lever to “N” position, then shift to “M” position again a few seconds later. 3-24 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 3) Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting. WARNING Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. These operations prevent the vehicle from starting due to unintended activation of the creeping function. NOTICE Do not operate the system as described below. The life cycle of the clutch may be reduced. • Using the accelerator pedal to hold the vehicle on an uphill slope operation with the gearshift lever in the “M” or “D” position. If you perform this operation for a certain period of time, a warning buzzer will sound. • Shifting the gearshift lever to the “M”, “D” or “R” position while racing the engine. • Driving at low speed using a high gear. • Stopping on a slope using the creeping function. If you perform this operation for a certain period of time, a warning buzzer will sound. Starting off on an uphill/downhill slope: Uphill 1) Apply the parking brake firmly so that the vehicle does not roll backwards. 2) Shift the gearshift lever to the “M” position while depressing the brake pedal. Make sure that the gear position indicator in the instrumental cluster displays 1st gear. 3) Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator pedal gradually, and when the vehicle starts to move, release the parking brake and depress the accelerator pedal to start off. NOTICE On an uphill slope, never hold the vehicle at a stop using only the accelerator pedal or creeping function. If you perform this operation for a certain period of time, a warning buzzer will sound, and in some cases the engine will stall. This can also cause excessive damage to the clutch. In case the warning buzzer is on, shifting to 2nd gear will not be possible in manual mode. Always use 1st gear while starting off on a uphill slope. Otherwise you may damage the clutch. Downhill 1) Depress the brake pedal and shift the gearshift lever to the “M” position. Check the gear position indicator to make sure that the gear is in 1st. 2) Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator pedal slowly. Even though the accelerator pedal is not depressed, the clutch will be engaged when the vehicle speed increases. Backing up After the vehicle has stopped completely, depress the brake pedal and shift the gearshift lever to the “R” position. Depress the accelerator pedal slowly as when starting off in 1st gear. Before backing up, make sure that reverse gear is selected by checking the gear position indicator. EXAMPLE 76MH0A062 NOTE: • If reverse gear cannot be engaged even though the gearshift lever has been shifted from the “N” to the “R” position, the system will re-try shifting automatically. This will take some time, noise 3-25 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE may be heard from the gears, and shifting gear shock may occur. However, they do not indicate malfunction. • The “N” indicator will flash, the depress brake pedal indicator will come on and a warning buzzer (long pulse sound) will sound if any of the following cases occur; – If you shift the gearshift lever from the “N” to the “R” position without depressing the brake pedal – If the system is unable to re-try shifting You should depress the brake pedal and shift the gearshift lever to “N” position, then shift to “R” position again a few seconds later. • The system will not allow shifting to the “R” position if the vehicle speed is over about 3 km/h. If the gearshift lever is operated under this condition, the “N” indicator in the instrument cluster will blink. However, when the vehicle speed drops below about 3 km/h, the gear will be shifted to reverse. Make sure that the vehicle has stopped completely before shifting to the “R” position. NOTICE On a downhill slope, never hold the vehicle at a stop using only the accelerator pedal or the creeping function. If you perform this operation for a certain period of time, a warning buzzer will sound, and in some cases the engine will stall. This can also cause excessive damage to the clutch. Stopping The vehicle can be stopped by depressing the brake pedal regardless of the gear position. This is because the clutch is automatically disengaged to prevent the engine from stopping. • If the gearshift lever is in the “D” position, the gear will be downshifted to 1st when the vehicle stops. • If the gearshift lever is in the “M” position, the gear will be downshifted to 1st when the vehicle stops. WARNING • When stopping, for example, at a traffic light, be sure to depress the brake pedal firmly. For your safety, apply the parking brake, too, when stopping on a hill. • When racing the engine, make sure that the gear is in the “N” position by checking the gear position indicator. If the accelerator is operated with the gear in any other position, the vehicle may move resulting in an accident. • Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running. (Continued) 3-26 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING (Continued) • When leaving the vehicle, stop the engine and park the vehicle with a gear engaged. If you need to leave the vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brakes firmly, and shift the gearshift lever to the “N” position. Otherwise, the vehicle may move unexpectedly and may cause an accident. NOTICE • On a slope, never hold the vehicle at a stop using only the accelerator pedal or the creeping function. If you perform this operation for a certain period of time, a warning buzzer will sound, and in some cases the engine will stall. This can also cause excessive damage to the clutch. • If the gearshift lever is operated more than necessary, the system may not allow operation of the gearshift for a certain period of time, and the gear may not be shifted appropriately. Therefore, do not operate the gearshift lever if not necessary. Parking Unlike an automatic transmission, Auto Gear Shift does not have a parking position. The vehicle can be parked with the gearshift lever at “D” or “R” position. Remember, even though the transmission is in gear, you must set the parking brake firmly. Park the vehicle with a gear engaged. 1) Apply the parking brake firmly. 2) While depressing the brake pedal, shift the gearshift lever to the “R” position on a downhill slope, and to the 1st position in the drive (D) mode or the “M” position in the manual (M) mode on an uphill slope and confirm the gear position by checking the gear position indicator. 3) Stop the engine. 4) In the case of uphill/downhill slope, release the parking brake and brake pedal slowly in order to check the gear is engaged. 5) After check the vehicle stopped by the gear engaged, Apply the parking brake and the brake pedal firmly again. 6) Get out of the vehicle and put chocks under the wheels. When you return to your vehicle, you must remember to remove the wheel chocks. NOTE: • After the engine is stopped, the gear in the transmission does not change even if you shift the gearshift lever in any position. Always shift the gearshift lever before stopping the engine. • Check the transmission gear position by looking at the gear position indicator, then turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” position or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF), to stop the engine. Release the brake pedal after a few seconds. WARNING • If the gear is not engaged properly and completely before the ignition switch is turned to “LOCK” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF), the vehicle may not be parked with the gear engaged. Always confirm the gear position by checking the gear position indicator when parking. • On a downhill slope, the gear should be put in reverse, and in 1st gear on an uphill slope. In case of uphill/downhill slope, after checking the vehicle stopped by the gear engaged, put the chocks under the wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle may move, and cause an unexpected accident. If the gear is left in the “N” position, the vehicle cannot be parked with a gear engaged. Parking cancel Depress the brake pedal, turn the ignition switch to “ON” position or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to 3-27 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE “ON”, and shift the gearshift lever to the “N” position. The gear will be disengaged. Warning functions A warning buzzer will sound or the indicator will blink under the following conditions. Warning buzzer • The clutch is heated due to excessive load. • The creeping function is being activated for a long period of time. NOTICE In the above cases, pull over to the side of the road and stop the engine, and then ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to inspect your vehicle. Otherwise, the clutch disc may be damaged. • The ignition switch is turned to “LOCK” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) with the gear in 2nd, 3rd, 4th or 5th. In this case, turn the ignition switch to “ON” position or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “ON”, and shift the gearshift lever in the “N” position, shift it to the “D” or “M” or “R” position, then turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” position or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode “LOCK” (OFF). • During a stop, the driver’s door is opened with the gearshift lever in the “R”, “D” or “M” position while the engine is running. Gearshift indicator (if equipped) “N” indicator blinking When the gear indicator lamp blinks “N”, you should depress the brake pedal and shift the gearshift lever to “N” position. “1” indicator blinking When the gear indicator lamp blinks “1st”, you should depress the brake pedal and shift the gearshift lever to “N” position, then shift to “D” or “M” position again a few seconds later. “R” indicator blinking When the gear indicator lamp blinks “R”, you should depress the brake pedal and shift the gearshift lever to “N” position, then shift to “R” position again a few seconds later. 69RH050 When the gearshift lever is in a position other than “N” (Neutral), the gearshift indicator is indicated on the information display when the ignition switch is in “ON” position or the ignition mode is “ON”. The electronic control system monitors driving condition (such as vehicle speed and/or engine revolution), and it shows which gear position is optimal for your driving with the indication on the display. If UP/DOWN arrow is indicated on the display while driving, we recommend you to shift up or down the gear until the arrow disappears. It is the optimal gear position for a driving condition that reduces the over revolution and stress to the engine, and improves fuel consumption. For details on how to use the transmission, refer to “Using transmission” in this section. 3-28 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING The gearshift indicator is designed to indicate optimal gear position for your driving, however, a driver will not be relieved from the duty of care of driving operation or gear change with this indicator. To drive safe, do not gaze the gearshift indicator, pay attention to your driving situation and shift up or down if necessary. NOTE: • The gearshift indicator is not indicated when the gear position is in “N” (Neutral). • If you depress the clutch pedal while UP/ DOWN arrow is indicated, the indication will disappear. • If you release the accelerator pedal while UP/DOWN arrow is indicated, the indication will disappear. The indication of gearshift indicator timing may differ depending on the vehicle condition and/or driving situation even in the same vehicle speed and engine revolution. Example of the gearshift indicator Indication Description Lower gear position is selected for the vehicle speed and/or engine revolution. Changing to a higher gear position is recommended. Higher gear position is selected for the vehicle speed and/or engine revolution. Changing to a lower gear position is recommended. ENG A-STOP System (Engine Auto Stop Start System) The ENG A-STOP system (engine auto stop start system) automatically stops the engine while waiting briefly at a traffic light, etc., and automatically restarts the engine afterward. This system helps reduce emissions, improve fuel consumption and lower engine noise. This system stops the engine temporarily under specific conditions. Before parking the vehicle for an extended period of time or leaving the vehicle, properly apply the parking brake and stop the engine with the engine switch. Once the specific conditions are met, the engine will stop automatically after the vehicle has stopped. However, the engine will not be stopped automatically until confirmation of the system function is finished. 3-29 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION • Do not get out of the vehicle while the engine is automatically stopped by the ENG A-STOP system. Doing so may lead to an accident. – Manual transmission vehicle – If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened and the driver’s door is opened, the engine will stall. – Auto Gear Shift vehicle – If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened, even if the brake pedal is pressed down, or the driver’s door is opened, the engine will be restarted to warn you that the engine was stopped automatically by the ENG A-STOP system. • If the engine does not restart automatically after having been stopped automatically by the ENG A-STOP system, turn the ignition key to "START" or push the engine switch to start the engine. Trying to move the vehicle when the engine has not yet restarted requires a strong force to turn the steering wheel or depress the brake pedal, potentially leading to an accident. NOTICE The vehicle equipped with this system uses a dedicated high-performance battery that supports ENG ASTOP system. Accordingly, observe the instructions listed below. If these instructions are not observed, the system may not actuate properly or the battery may die prematurely. • When replacing the battery, use a MARUTI SUZUKI genuine battery specified in the Specification. • Do not draw power from the battery terminals for electrical products. Automatic Stopping/Restarting of the Engine Manual transmission vehicle 1) With the brake pedal depressed, decelerate the vehicle. (1) EXAMPLE 81RM03015 2) After the vehicle has stopped with the clutch pedal depressed and the gearshift lever shifted to “N”, and then release the clutch pedal, the engine will stop automatically. The ENG A-STOP indicator light (green) (1) will come on. • The ENG A-STOP system will not stop the engine automatically if all the automatic engine stop conditions are not met. For details, refer to the section, “Automatic engine stop conditions”. 3-30 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE • During the automatic engine stop, the engine may shut down, accompanied by an interior buzzer or restarted, to ensure safety. For details, refer to the section, “Points to note during the automatic engine stop”. NOTE: For manual transmission vehicles, if the engine stalled by a rapid clutch operation, the engine will restart with the gear positioned “N” (neutral) and the clutch pedal depressed. NOTICE The engine will not restart if the following operations are performed during the automatic engine stop • Do not shift the gearshift lever to a position other than “N” without depressing the clutch pedal. If the gear shift lever is in a position other than “N”, the engine will not restart automatically even if the clutch pedal is depressed. • If the driver unfastens the seat belt, the engine does not restart automatically even if the clutch pedal is depressed. Also a buzzer will sound to alert the driver. In this case, fasten the seat belt. NOTE: During the automatic engine stop, electric equipment will be in the following condition: • The audio and other electrical component can be used during the automatic engine stop, but the air conditioner will switch to the fan mode. While the engine is stopped automatically, depressing the clutch pedal will restart the engine consuming fuel. Therefore, for fuel economy, it is recommended to depress the clutch pedal just before the vehicle start. • Without depressing the clutch pedal, the engine may restart automatically if the automatic engine restart conditions are met. For details, refer to the section, “Automatic engine restart conditions”. (1) Auto Gear Shift vehicle 1) With the brake pedal depressed, stop the vehicle. EXAMPLE (1) 81RM03013 3) Regardless of whether the vehicle has stopped or not, depressing the clutch pedal will restart the engine and ENG A-STOP indicator light (green) (1) will go off. (1) EXAMPLE 81RM03014 2) While depressing the brake pedal, place the gearshift lever in “D” position. “ENG A-STOP” indicator light (green) 3-31 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE (1) in the instrument cluster will illuminate and the engine will stop automatically. • The ENG A-STOP system will not stop the engine automatically if all the automatic engine stop conditions are not met. For details, refer to the section, “Automatic engine stop conditions”. • During the automatic engine stop, the engine may shut down, accompanied by an interior buzzer or restarted, to ensure safety. For details, refer to the section, “Points to note during the automatic engine stop”. NOTE: During the automatic engine stop, electric equipment will be in the following condition: • The audio and other electrical component can be used during the automatic engine stop, but the air conditioner will switch to the fan mode. EXAMPLE (1) 56RM03007 3) Remove your foot from the brake pedal. “ENG A-STOP” indicator light (green) (1) in the instrument cluster will be turned off and the engine will restart automatically. When restarting the engine, keeping brake force temporarily prevents the vehicle from moving forward by the creeping function. Also, this prevents the vehicle from rolling downward on a hill. For details, refer to the section “Hill hold control system”. NOTE: When the engine is restarted automatically, the following conditions may be found as the hill hold control system is activated, but this is not a malfunction. • You may hear a sound from the engine room. • As brake pedal becomes heavy, it may be difficult for you to depress it. NOTE: When the engine does not restart automatically when the brake pedal is relased, an interior buzzer will sound and the engine will come out of the automatic engine stop mode and shut down. The ENG A-STOP indicator light (green) will go off. Points to note during the automatic engine stop When the following operations are performed during the automatic engine stop, the engine may shut down, accompanied by an interior buzzer or restarted, to ensure safety. • When the hood is opened, an interior buzzer will sound intermittently and the engine will come out of the automatic engine stop mode and shut down. The ENG A-STOP indicator light (green) will go off. • For manual transmission model, when the driver relases the seat belt and opens the driver's door, the buzzer sounds for 2.5 seconds and the ENG ASTOP indicator light (green) turns off and then the engine will stall. • For Auto Gear Shift vehicle, if the engine does not start 2 seconds after the brake is released, the buzzer will sound, the ENG A-STOP light will go off, and the engine will stall. NOTE: The power steering warning light, oil pressure warning light and charge warning light on the meter panel do not come on during the automatic engine stop, but they will come on once the engine shuts down. When the engine stalls, restart the engine by usual operation. Refer to “Starting the engine (vehicle with keyless push start system)” or “Starting engine (vehicle without keyless push start system)” in this section for details. 3-32 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Actuation conditions for ENG A-STOP system Standby conditions When all of the following conditions are met while the vehicle is traveling, ENG ASTOP system will be permitted: • The engine is started with the hood completely closed. • The hood is completely closed. • The ENG A-STOP OFF switch has not been pressed to deactivate the ENG ASTOP system. • The battery is fully charged and the temperature inside the battery is within the specified range (#1). • The engine has warmed up and the engine coolant temperature is within the specified range. • The driver is wearing seat belts. • The driver’s door is completely closed. • No electronically controlled system besides the ENG A-STOP system is issuing a signal to inhibit stopping of the engine (#2). • The negative pressure of the brake booster is normal. (a) EXAMPLE 55RH03001 • The ABS system has not been activated during one driving cycle (a) from the engine start to the vehicle start and stop. • The gearshift lever is in “N” (Neutral) position (for manual transmission vehicle). • The gearshift lever is in “D” or “N” (for Auto Gear Shift vehicle). #1 If the vehicle has not been in use for an extended period of time or the audio or other electrical component was used for an extended period of time while the engine was stopped, the battery may have discharged and it may take some time before the standby mode is achieved. #2 If any of the warning and indicator lights affecting the ENG A-STOP system come on, the engine will not be stopped automatically. Automatic engine stop conditions When all of the following conditions are met under the standby conditions, the engine will stop automatically after the vehicle has stopped: • The gearshift lever is in “N” (Neutral) position (for manual transmission vehicle). • The clutch pedal is released (for manual transmission vehicle). • Engine auto stop function will be ready once the vehicle runs at a speed exceeding 6km/h after restart of the engine. • The vehicle has stopped. • The accelerator pedal is not depressed. The vehicle is not stopped on a steep hill (for auto gear shift vehicle). • The gearshift lever is in “D” or “N” position.(for Auto Gear Shift vehicle).. • The brake pedal is depressed appropriately. (for Auto Gear Shift vehicle). NOTICE For Auto Gear Shift vehicle, the ENG A-STOP system will not operate, if the brake pedal is depressed weakly or very strongly. Automatic engine restart conditions If one of the following operations is performed or the vehicle enters one of the following modes during the automatic engine stop, the engine will restart automatically and the ENG A-STOP indicator light (green) will go off: • The clutch pedal is depressed (for manual transmission vehicle). 3-33 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE • When the brake pedal is released (for Auto Gear Shift vehicle). • The ENG A-STOP OFF switch is pressed to deactivate the ENG A-STOP system. • The battery has discharged substantially (#). • A malfunction of the system is detected (#). • The negative pressure of the brake booster has dropped (#). • The accelerator pedal depressed (for Auto Gear Shift vehicle). • The gearshift lever is put in “R” or in “M” position (for auto gear shift vehicle). • After the gearshift lever is shifted to “N”, it is returned to “D” (for auto gear shift vehicle). • The driver releases the seat belt (for Auto Gear Shift vehicle) (#). • The driver’s door is opened (for Auto Gear Shift vehicle) (#). • The vehicle starts to move on a slope, etc. (#). • Some time (2 minutes or so) has elapsed after the start of the automatic engine stop (#). • For manual transmission vehicle, the engine does not restart automatically, if the gearshift lever is in other than “N”. # The ENG A-STOP indicator light (green) will blink and then go off. NOTICE For manual transmission vehicle, if driver's seat belt is not fastened or the gear shift lever is in a position other than “N”, the engine will not restarted automatically. NOTE: Pressing the ENG A-STOP OFF switch (1) during the automatic engine stop will restart the engine automatically and the ENG A-STOP OFF light (2) will come on. ENG A-STOP OFF Light ENG A-STOP OFF Switch The ENG A-STOP system can be deactivated. • To deactivate the system, press the ENG A-STOP OFF switch (1) to turn on ENG A-STOP OFF light (2). • To activate the system once again, press the switch (1) again to turn off the indicator. Every time the engine is stopped manually, the system is enabled again and the ENG A-STOP OFF light (2) goes off. EXAMPLE 56RM03012 When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”, this light comes on briefly if the system works properly. When you push the ENG A-STOP OFF switch, this light comes on. (1) (2) If this light blinks when driving, there may be something wrong with the ENG ASTOP system. You should have the system inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. EXAMPLE 81RM03017 3-34 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Parking sensors • The parking sensor system uses ultrasonic sensors to detect obstacles near the rear bumper. If obstacles are sensed while you are parking or moving the vehicle slowly, the system warns you by sounding a buzzer. • The system emits an ultrasonic wave and the relevant sensor detects the return of the wave reflected by an obstacle. The system measures the time taken by the ultrasonic wave to reach the obstacle and return from it, from which it determines the obstacle’s position. • The parking sensor function can be used when you turn the ignition switch to “ON” position and the gearshift lever is in the “R” position. This function is helpful in the following cases: pulling over to the curb; parallel parking the vehicle; steering the vehicle into a garage; driving along an alley; and moving slowly in a place with obstacles. WARNING • The parking sensor warns you of obstacles with buzzers. However, you still have to drive with particular care. • The sensors can detect obstacles only within a limited area and only when the vehicle is moving within a limited speed range. So, in tricky areas, you must move the vehicle slowly while checking around it using your direct vision or rearview mirrors. There is increased risk of an accident if you control the vehicle relying only on the parking sensor. NOTE: When the gearshift lever is shifted to the “R” position, a buzzer will sound once. NOTICE Parking sensors are only for driver’s assistance. Sensor locations On rear bumper EXAMPLE (1) 81RM03018 (1) Rear sensors (2 places) NOTICE • Avoid hitting the sensor areas or directing the nozzle of a high-pressure car washer onto the sensor areas. Otherwise, the sensors may be damaged. • If the bumper hits a hard object, the sensors on it may not work properly. If this occurs, have the sensors inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. 3-35 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Working sensors The sensors work depending on the gearshift lever position as follows: Gearshift lever position Rear sensors Manual transmission Approximate areas where obstacles can be detected Auto Gear Shift R N, 1st – 5th R N, D, M On Off On Off EXAMPLE 81RM03002 • An obstacle within about 20 cm (8 in) from a sensor or just below a sensor is not detectable. • The sensors can detect an obstacle up to about 1.5 m (5 ft) from the rear of vehicle. 3-36 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING • Under the following conditions, the parking sensor system may not work normally because the sensors cannot detect obstacles correctly. – Sensors are covered with mud, ice or other materials. (Such materials must be removed for normal operation.) – Sensors are wet from water splashes or heavy rain. – Sensors are covered by a hand, sticker, accessory, etc. – There is an accessory or other object attached within the sensor’s sensing area. – Items such as tow hooks, commercially available corner poles, radio antenna, etc. are installed on the bumper. – The height of the bumper is changed due to alteration to the suspension or other causes. – The sensor areas are extremely hot from direct sunlight or cold due to freezing weather. – The vehicle is on a rough surface, slope, gravel road or grass field. – The vehicle is at a steep angle. (Continued) WARNING (Continued) – Sensors have intercepted ultrasonic noise from another vehicle’s horn, engine, air braking system (large vehicles), or parking sensor. – Obstacles are too close to the sensors. – Sensors are at an angle to a highly reflective object such as glass. (Ultrasonic waves are not reflected back from the obstacle.) • Sensors may not be able to correctly detect the following types of obstacles: – Objects made of a thin material such as wire netting and ropes – Square-shaped curbstones or other objects with sharp edges – Tall objects with a large upper part such as a road sign – Low-profile objects such as curbstones – Sound-absorbing objects such as cotton and snow NOTE: • Thin poles or obstacles lower than the sensors may become undetectable as the vehicle moves closer to them even if they have been detected from longer distances. • The system may calculate the distance to a road sign or similar obstacle to be shorter than the actual distance. 3-37 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Obstacle indication by parking sensor Upon detecting an obstacle, the parking sensor causes an interior buzzer to sound. • A buzzer located behind the rear seat sounds when a sensor at the rear detects an obstacle. • Warnings when obstacles are detected by sensors Distance (approx.) Buzzer 100 – 150 cm (39 – 59 in) Short beeps at short intervals 60 – 100 cm (24 – 39 in) Short beeps at very short intervals Less than 60 cm (24 in) Continuous beep Warning and indicator messages If there is a problem or warning regarding the parking sensor system, a buzzer informs it. Follow its instruction. • The buzzer sounds intermittently. The indicated sensor is contaminated. Wipe it clean with a soft cloth. If the buzzer does not stop after wiping, there may be problem with the parking sensor system. Have your vehicle inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. Braking WARNING EXAMPLE If water gets into the brake devices, brake performance may become poor and unpredictable. After driving through water or washing the underside of the vehicle, test the brakes while driving at a slow speed to see if they have maintained their normal effectiveness. If the brakes are less effective than normal, dry them by repeatedly applying the brakes while driving slowly until the brakes have regained their normal effectiveness. 60G165S The distance needed to bring any vehicle to a halt increases with the speed of the vehicle. The braking distance needed, for example, at 60 km/h will be approximately 4 times greater than the braking distance needed at 30 km/h. Start to depress the brake pedal when there is plenty of distance between your vehicle and the stopping point, and slow down gradually. Power-assisted brakes Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes. If power assistance is lost due to a stalled engine or other failures, the system is still fully operational on reserve power and you can bring the vehicle to a complete stop by pressing the brake pedal once and holding it down. The reserve power is partly used up when you depress the brake pedal and reduces each time the pedal is pressed. Apply smooth and even pressure to the pedal. Do not pump the pedal. 3-38 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Even without reserve power in the brake system, you can still stop the vehicle by pressing the brake pedal harder than normally required. However, the stopping distance may be longer. Brake assist system When you slam the brakes on, the brake assist system determines it to be an emergency stop and provides more powerful braking for a driver who cannot hold down the brake pedal firmly. NOTE: If you quickly and forcefully depress the brakes, you may hear clicking sound by the brake assist system operation. This is normal and indicates that the brake assist system is activated properly. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ABS will help you avoid skidding by electronically controlling braking pressure. It will also help you maintain steering control when braking on slippery surfaces or when braking hard. The ABS works automatically, so you do not need any special braking technique. Just push the brake pedal down without pumping. The ABS will operate whenever it senses that the wheels are locking up. You may feel the brake pedal move a little while the ABS is operating. NOTE: • The ABS will not work if vehicle speed is under about 9 km/h. • If the ABS system is activated, you may hear a clunking noise and/or feel pulsating in the brake pedal. This is normal and indicates that the brake fluid pressure is being controlled properly. • You may hear an operation sound when you start the engine or after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the above systems are in the self-check mode. This sound does not indicate a malfunction. WARNING • On some types of loose surfaces (such as gravel, snow-covered roads, etc.), the stopping distance required for a vehicle with ABS may be slightly greater than the one required for a comparable vehicle with a conventional brake system. With a conventional brake system, skidding tires are able to plow the gravel or snow layer, shortening the stopping distance. ABS minimizes this resistance effect. Allow for extra stopping distance when driving on loose surfaces. • On regular paved roads, some drivers may be able to obtain slightly shorter stopping distances with conventional brake systems than with ABS. • In both of the above conditions, ABS will still offer the advantage of helping you maintain directional control. However, remember that ABS will not compensate for bad road or weather conditions or poor driver judgment. Use good judgment and do not drive too fast. 3-39 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING EXAMPLE (1) (2) 54MN069 (1) ABS warning light (2) Brake system warning light • If the ABS warning light (1) on the instrument cluster comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the ABS system. Ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to inspect the ABS system immediately. If the ABS system becomes inoperative, the brake system will function as an ordinary brake system that has no ABS. • If the ABS warning light (1) and the brake system warning light (2) on the instrument cluster simultaneously stay on or come on while driving, both anti-lock function and rear brake force control function (proportioning valve function) of the ABS system may have failed. If so, the rear wheels may easily skid or the vehicle can even spin in the worst case when braking on a slippery road or when hard braking even on a dry paved road. Ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to inspect the ABS system immediately. Drive carefully, avoiding hard braking as much as possible. How ABS works A computer continuously monitors wheel speed. The computer compares the changes in wheel speed when braking. If the wheels slow suddenly, indicating a skidding situation, the computer will change braking pressure several times each second to prevent the wheels from locking. When you start your vehicle or when you accelerate after a hard stop, you may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise as the system resets or checks itself. WARNING The ABS may not work properly if tires or wheels other than those specified in the owner’s manual are used. This is because the ABS works by comparing changes in wheel speed. When replacing tires or wheels, use only the size and type specified in this owner’s manual. 3-40 81RM0-74E OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Hill Hold Control System (if equipped) The hill hold control system is designed to assist you in starting to move up hills. When you start to move up a hill, the system helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling downward (for approximately 2 seconds) while you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. WARNING • Do not rely excessively on the hill hold control system. The hill hold control system may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downward on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling downward. Failure to pay attention and depress the brake pedal to hold the vehicle on a hill when necessary, may result in loss of control or an accident. • The hill hold control system is not designed to stop the vehicle on a hill. • After you release your foot from the brake pedal, accelerate the vehicle to move up immediately. If you release your foot from the brake pedal over 2 seconds, the hill hold control system will be canceled. If so, the vehicle may roll downward, (Continued) WARNING (Continued) which can result in an accident depending on the degree of slope. And, the engine may stall and the power assist for the steering and brakes will not work so steering and braking will be much harder than usual which can result in an accident or vehicle damage. • If you drive on the steep slope ,the gravel, the snow covered road, or the muddy road and the hill hold control system is activated, there maybe a possibility that the wheels will be locked and then the vehicle may lose the control. The hill hold control system activates for a maximum of about 2 seconds if your foot is moved from the brake pedal when the following conditions are all met. 1) The gearshift lever is in a forward gear or reverse gear. 2) The parking brake is released. 3) The vehicle is on an upward incline NOTE: When the hill hold control system is activated, the following conditions may be found, but this is not a malfunction. • You may hear a sound from the engine room. • As brake pedal becomes heavy, it may be difficult for you to depress it. Brake system warning light (amber color) 82K170 If the brake system warning light (amber color) comes on and stays on, there may be a problem with the hill hold control system. Have your vehicle inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop. On models equipped with the ENG ASTOP system, the hill hold control system is activated when the engine is restarted after being stopped automatically, even if the previous conditions are not met. 3-41 81RM0-74E DRIVING TIPS DRIVING TIPS Running-in ........................................................................... 4-1 Catalytic converter .............................................................. 4-1 Improving fuel economy ..................................................... 4-2 Highway driving .................................................................. 4-3 Driving on hills .................................................................... 4-3 Driving on slippery roads ................................................... 4-4 Driving on wet roads ........................................................... 4-5 Off-road driving ................................................................... 4-6 When encountering a flooded area ................................... 4-6 Precaution for Handling Vehicle......................................... 4-7 Do’s and Dont’s for safe driving......................................... 4-7 Margin for safety .................................................................. 4-9 4 81RM04011 81RM0-74E DRIVING TIPS Running-in EXAMPLE Catalytic converter NOTICE 55RM04002 WARNING • Fasten your seat belts at all times. Even though airbags are equipped at the front seating positions, the driver and all passengers should be properly restrained at all times, using the seat belts provided. Refer to “Seat belts and child restraint systems” section for instructions on proper use of the seat belts. • Never drive under the influence of alcohol or other drugs. Alcohol and drugs can seriously impair your ability to drive safely, greatly increasing the risk of injury to yourself and others. You should also avoid driving when you are tired, sick, irritated or under stress. The future performance and reliability of the engine depends on the care and restraint exercised during its early life. It is especially important to observe the following precautions during the first 960 km of vehicle operation. • After starting, do not race the engine. Warm it up gradually. • Avoid prolonged vehicle operation at a constant speed. Moving parts will break in better if you vary your speed. • Start off from a stop slowly. Avoid full throttle starts. • Avoid hard braking, especially during the first 320 km of driving. • Do not drive slowly with the transmission in a high gear. • Drive the vehicle at moderate engine speeds. • Do not tow a trailer EXAMPLE 80G106 The purpose of the catalytic converter is to minimize the amount of harmful pollutants in your vehicle’s exhaust. Use of leaded fuel in vehicles equipped with catalytic converters is prohibited, because lead deactivates the pollutant-reducing components of the catalyst system. The converter is designed to last the life of the vehicle under normal usage and when unleaded fuel is used. No special maintenance is required on the converter. However, it is very important to keep the engine properly tuned. Engine misfiring, which can result from an improperly tuned engine, may cause overheating of the catalytic converter. This may result in permanent heat damage to the catalytic converter and other vehicle components. 4-1 81RM0-74E DRIVING TIPS NOTICE To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter or other vehicle damage: • Maintain the engine in the proper operating condition. • In the event of an engine malfunction, particularly one involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have the vehicle serviced promptly. • Do not turn off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle, or coasting down a hill. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as during diagnostic testing. • Do not idle the vehicle for prolonged periods if idling seems rough or there are other malfunctions. • Do not allow the fuel tank to get near the empty level. Improving fuel economy EXAMPLE NOTE: Fuel economy (mileage) of the vehicle may vary due to several factors i.e., driving habits - gear change pattern, usage of A.C, Air pressure in the tyres, wind speed, traffic conditions, fuel quality- non adulterated standard fuel, maintenance of vehicle, road conditions, braking etc. The following instructions will help you improve fuel economy. 81RM04001 WARNING Be careful where you park and drive; the catalytic converter and other exhaust components can get very hot. As with any vehicle, do not park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust system. Avoid excessive idling If you are to wait for more than a minute while you are parked, stop the engine and start it again later. When warming up a cold engine, do not allow the engine to idle or apply full throttle until the engine has reached operating temperature. Allow the engine to warm up by driving. Avoid sudden acceleration Sudden acceleration starting from rest or while driving will consume fuel unnecessarily and shorten engine life. Start off slowly. Avoid unnecessary stops Avoid unnecessary deceleration and stopping. Try to maintain a slow, steady speed whenever possible. Slowing down and then accelerating again uses more fuel. Keep a steady cruising speed Drive at a constant speed that road and traffic conditions will permit. 4-2 81RM0-74E DRIVING TIPS Highway driving Keep the air cleaner clean EXAMPLE 60A183S If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there will be greater intake resistance, resulting in decreased power output and increased fuel consumption. Keep weight to a minimum The heavier the load is, the more fuel the vehicle consumes. Unload any unnecessary luggage or cargo. When driving at highway speeds, pay attention to the following: • Stopping distance progressively increases with vehicle speed. Apply the brakes far enough ahead of the stopping point to allow for the extra stopping distance. • On rainy days, hydroplaning can occur. Hydroplaning is the loss of direct contact between the road surface and the vehicle’s tires due to a water film forming between them. Steering or braking the vehicle during hydroplaning can be very difficult, and loss of control can occur. Keep speed down when the road surface is wet. • At high speeds, the vehicle may be affected by side winds. Therefore, reduce speed and be prepared for unexpected buffeting, which can occur at the exits of tunnels, when passing by a cut of a hill, or when being overtaken by large vehicles, etc. Driving on hills Manual transmission EXAMPLE 69RH021 Auto Gear Shift EXAMPLE Keep tire pressures correct Under-inflation of the tires can waste fuel due to increased running resistance of the tires. Keep your tires inflated to the correct pressure shown on the label on the driver’s side door or the driver’s door lock pillar. 81RM04010 4-3 81RM0-74E DRIVING TIPS • When climbing steep hills, the vehicle may begin to slow down and show a lack of power. If this happens, you should shift to a lower gear so that the engine will again be operating in its normal power range. Shift rapidly to prevent the vehicle from losing momentum. • When driving down a hill, the engine should be used for braking by shifting to the next lower gear. While moving uphill/gradient from a stand still condition (For manual transmission models) 1) Apply the parking brake firmly so that the vehicle does not roll backwards. 2) Depress the clutch pedal and shift the gearshift lever to 1st select position. 3) When ready to start, depress the accelerator pedal while at the same time releasing the clutch pedal slowly. When the vehicle starts to move, gradually release the parking brake. (For Auto Gear Shift models) Refer to “Using transmission” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. WARNING Do not hold the brake pedal down too long or too often while going down a steep or long hill. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Failure to take this precaution could result in loss of vehicle control. Driving on slippery roads EXAMPLE NOTICE When descending a downhill, Never turn the ignition key to “LOCK” position or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF). Emission control system damage may result. 81RM04002 On wet roads, you should drive at a lower speed than you do on dry roads due to possible slippage of tires during braking. When driving on icy, snow-covered or muddy roads, reduce your speed and avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt braking, or sharp steering movements. Snow chains Snow chains should only be used if they are needed to increase traction or are required by law. Check that the chains you use are the correct size for your vehicle’s tires. Also check that there is enough clearance between the fenders and the chains as installed on the tires. Install the chains on the front tires tightly, according to the chain manufacturer’s instructions. Retighten the chains after 4-4 81RM0-74E DRIVING TIPS driving about 1.0 km if necessary. With the chains installed, drive slowly. NOTICE • If you hear the chains hitting against the vehicle body while driving, stop and tighten them. • If your vehicle is equipped with full wheel caps, remove the wheel caps before installing the chains or the wheel caps can be damaged by the chain bands. Stuck vehicle If your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud or sand, follow the directions below: 1) Shift the transmission back and forth between a forward range (or first gear for manual transmission) and reverse. This will create a rocking motion which may give you enough momentum to free the vehicle. Press gently on the accelerator to keep wheel spinning to a minimum wheel rpm. Remove your foot from the accelerator while shifting. Do not race the engine. Excessive wheel spin will cause the tires to dig deeper, making it more difficult to free the vehicle. 2) If your vehicle remains stuck after a few minutes of rocking, we recommend you to consult a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop or a roadside assistance service. If a towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a towing cable or chain secured to the towing eye either on the front of the vehicle or on the rear of the vehicle. Refer to “Frame hooks” in the “OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT” section. Driving on wet roads EXAMPLE WARNING Do not allow anyone to stand near the vehicle when you are rocking it, and do not spin the wheels faster than an indicated 40 km/h on the speedometer. Personal injury and/or vehicle damage may result from spinning the wheels too fast. 81RM04003 NOTICE NOTICE Do not continue rocking the vehicle for more than a few minutes. Prolonged rocking can cause engine overheating or transmission damage. • When driving on wet roads, avoid driving through large amount of standing water on the road. Large amount of water entering the engine compartment may cause damage to the engine and or electrical components. • If stuck in deep water, do not start the engine. • Water is incompressible substance, water inside engine is harmful to the engine. 4-5 81RM0-74E DRIVING TIPS WARNING In addition to following the driving tips in this section, it is important to observe the following precautions. • Check that your tires are in good condition and always maintain the specified tire pressure. Refer to “Tires” in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section for details. • Do not use tires other than those specified by MARUTI SUZUKI. Never use different sizes or types of tires on the front and rear wheels. For information regarding the specified tires, refer to the tire information label located on the driver’s door lock pillar. • Never use oversized tires or special shock absorbers and springs to raise (jack up) your vehicle. This will change the handling characteristics. Oversized tires may also rub against the fender over bumps, causing vehicle damage or tire failure. (Continued) WARNING (Continued) • After driving through water, test the brakes while driving at a slow speed to see if they have maintained their normal effectiveness. If the brakes are less effective than normal, dry them by repeatedly applying the brakes while driving slowly until the brakes have regained their normal effectiveness. When encountering a flooded area EXAMPLE Off-road driving Do not drive in the field covered with grown grass If you drive in the field covered with grass, it may cause accident or vehicle damage by getting caught in grown grass. 81RM04009 Avoid driving in a flooded area or a deep puddle. If driving in a flooded area is unavoidable, go slowly in the lowest gear. In case that you have driven in a flooded area, stop the vehicle in a safe place while checking the brake effectiveness. Then, ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to check the following inspection items. • Function of brake • Function of electrical components • Changes in oil level and quality for engine and transmission. In case that the oil is turbid whitish, water has been mixed in the oil and an oil change is required. • Lubricant condition of the bearings, suspension joints, etc. 4-6 81RM0-74E DRIVING TIPS NOTICE • Avoid driving in a flooded area or a deep puddle. It may cause an engine stall, short in electrical components, engine and transmission damages, etc. • If the vehicle gets stuck in deep water do not start the engine. Precaution for Handling Vehicle Do not Apply Strong Force to Exterior Parts NOTICE Do not apply strong force to the spoiler, rear bumper, side skirts, etc. Doing so can cause damage to these exterior parts. Do’s and Dont’s for safe driving Exercise care in handling your vehicle. Be conscious of not only your own safety but also the safety of others on the road, and thus enjoy the best and most comfortable driving experience. Following are basic rules for safe driving. Read them carefully for good understanding of the content so that you can enjoy safe and pleasant driving in your vehicle. Starting 1) Adjust the driver’s seat for the proper driving posture. 2) Adjust the rear view mirror so as to obtain the best possible rear view. 3) Before moving, look around your vehicle to confirm safety. 4) Don’t accelerate suddenly, since it is dangerous and wastes fuel. General Driving 1) Be sure to stop before a stop light or stop sign. When moving into an intersection without any traffic lights or signs, drive slowly to confirm safety. 2) Always follow other vehicles at a safe distance in order to prevent a rear-end collision, in case the vehicle ahead makes a sudden stop. EXAMPLE EXAMPLE Be Careful of Uneven Road Surface NOTICE In the following cases, the bumper or the lower part of the vehicle could get damaged. Ensure proper care. • Entering the areas where there is uneven road surface, such as road shoulder • Driving on roads with grooves, bumps or potholes 81RM04004 72F-08-001 3) Turn on the turn signal at least 30 meters before making a turn or changing the lane so as not to be hit. 4) Before entering a corner, decelerate to a safe speed. Don’t apply brakes during cornering, or skidding may occur. 4-7 81RM0-74E DRIVING TIPS 5) When overtaking other vehicles, watch out for oncoming vehicles and carefully ensure safety. 6) Don’t attempt zigzag driving as it will hinder your control over the vehicle and may cause an accident. 7) Avoid reckless high speed driving and try to drive at a safe speed suitable for the road conditions while maintaining a constant speed. 8) The higher the speed, the narrower the driver’s visual range becomes. In such a state, it is difficult to anticipate any hazard and the driver feels fatigued. Braking EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 81RM04007 EXAMPLE 81RM04006 81RM04005 9) Do not attempt sharp handling during high speed driving. You may lose your control over your vehicle. 10)When overtaking or changing lanes while driving at a high speed, keep ample vehicle-to-vehicle distance. 1) Use the parking brake when parking your vehicle and shift the gear shift lever into the first gear or reverse gear position for the sake of safety. 2) Don’t use hand-braking unless unavoidable. It causes the vehicle to skid and a collision may occur. It is especially dangerous when the tires are worn out as they skid more. Use foot brake in three stages 1. Warn the vehicle behind you. 2. Gradually apply the brake. 3. Bring the vehicle to a halt. 3) When driving downhill, try not to apply the brake but use the engine brake effectively. Overuse of the foot-brake may result in reduction of brake effectiveness. Long Distance Driving 1) Be sure to perform safety checks before starting a trip. 2) Take rest at regular intervals to prevent accidents which may occur due to feeling sleepy or tired. 4-8 81RM0-74E DRIVING TIPS Margin for safety Night Time Driving EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 81RM04008 72F-08-021 1) Drive at lower speeds during the night than in the daytime, as the visual range is restricted at night. 2) Avoid overtaking other vehicles at night. Darkness bothers your sense of speed and hinders your judgment of vehicleto-vehicle distance. 3) Don’t use headlights on high beam unless its use is inevitable. It may cause visual impairment to the driver of the oncoming vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you, which may cause an accident. 4) Always keep the window glasses clean. Don’t operate the windshield wiper when the windshield glass is dry else the wiper blade and glass may get damaged. It is important to allow yourself a margin for safety during driving so that you can cope with erroneous or unexpected driving of other drivers. For that, observe the following. • Drive at a safe speed. • Maintain a sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. • Don’t force yourself to overtake other vehicles. • Don’t accelerate suddenly, steer sharply or stop suddenly. • Keep ample gaps between driving schedules. • Observe traffic rules and regulations. Conclusion A perfect driver does not exist. The endeavour of every motorist should be to strive for perfection. Safety consciousness not only ensures your safety and the safety of other road users, it also helps reduce the wear and tear on your vehicle, lengthens its life, gives better fuel efficiency and ensures a comfortable driving experience. Follow the do’s and dont’s listed, and driving will never be the same again. 4-9 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 60G407 Fuel filler cap ....................................................................... 5-1 Engine hood ........................................................................ 5-2 Sun visor .............................................................................. 5-4 Interior light ......................................................................... 5-5 Accessory socket ................................................................ 5-6 AUX/USB socket (if equipped) ........................................... 5-7 Assist grips .......................................................................... 5-7 Glove box ............................................................................. 5-7 5 Cup holder and storage area ............................................. 5-8 Footrest ................................................................................ 5-9 Luggage compartment cover (if equipped) ...................... 5-10 Frame hooks ........................................................................ 5-10 Heating and air conditioning system ................................ 5-14 Manual heating and air conditioning system ................... 5-15 Radio antenna ..................................................................... 5-19 Installation of radio frequency transmitters ..................... 5-19 Audio system (if equipped) ................................................ 5-20 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Fuel filler cap A fuel filler cap is located on the left rear side of the vehicle. The fuel filler door can be unlocked by pulling up the opener lever located on the outboard side of the driver’s seat and locked by simply closing the door. EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (3) Close Open (1) (1) (2) 69RM05005 81RM05001 (1) EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 57L51093 To remove the fuel filler cap: 1) Open the fuel filler door. 2) Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise. CAUTION Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel may be under pressure and may spray out, causing injury. 81RM05002 (4) 69RM05006 NOTE: The cap holder (1) holds the fuel filler cap (2) by hooking the groove (3), or the hook (4) also holds the fuel filler cap when refueling. 5-1 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT To reinstall the fuel filler cap: 1) Turn the cap clockwise until you hear several clicks. 2) Close the fuel filler door. WARNING • Fuel is extremely flammable. Do not smoke when refueling, and check that there are no open flames or sparks in the area. • If you need to replace the fuel cap, use a MARUTI SUZUKI genuine cap. Use of an improper cap can result in a malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system. It may also result in fuel leakage in the event of an accident. Engine hood WARNING • As the hood is heavy, if a child tries to open or close it, the child may get injured. Do not allow a child to open or close the hood. • As the engine compartment becomes hot, it may cause burns. When opening the hood, do not allow a child to come close to the hood. • If you leave any tool or cloth in the engine compartment, it may cause a malfunction. Also, as the engine compartment becomes hot, it may result in vehicle fire. Do not leave any tool or cloth for inspection or cleaning in the engine compartment. EXAMPLE 81RM05003 To open the engine hood: 1) Pull the hood release handle located on the outboard side of the driver’s side. This will disengage the engine hood lock halfway. CAUTION If you come close to a running drive belt or a cooling fan (radiator fan), hands, hair, clothing, etc. may be caught and you may get injured. When the engine is running, keep away from the drive belt or the cooling fan (radiator fan). 5-2 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT To close the engine hood: 1) Lift the hood up slightly and remove the prop rod from the hole. Put the prop rod back into the holding clip. EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 81RM05004 2) Push the under-hood release lever sideways with your finger, as shown in the illustration. While pushing the lever, lift up the engine hood. CAUTION The release lever can be hot enough to burn your finger right after driving. Touch the lever after it becomes cool enough. NOTICE Check that the wiper arms are not raised before you lift up the engine hood to avoid damaging the wiper arms and the engine hood. 81RM05005 3) While holding the hood, pull the prop rod out from the holding clip, and then insert the end of the rod into the designated hole. CAUTION • The prop rod can be hot enough to burn your finger right after driving. Hold the prop rod by protector (1). • Insert the end of the rod into the hole securely. If the rod slips out, you may get caught in the closing hood. • The rod may slip out when the hood is blown by wind. Be careful on windy days. 81RM05006 2) Lower the hood to about 20 cm above the hood latch, and then let it drop down. Check that the hood is securely latched after closing. WARNING Check that the hood is fully closed and latched before driving. If it is not, it can fly up unexpectedly during driving, obstructing your view and resulting in an accident. 5-3 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT CAUTION To avoid injury, check that no part of the occupant’s body such as hands or head is in the path of the hood when closing it. Sun visor Card holder EXAMPLE EXAMPLE NOTICE Pushing on the hood from the top may damage it. (1) 74LHT0516 79J161 The sun visors can be pulled down to block glare coming through the windshield, or they can be unhooked and turned to the side to block glare coming through the side window. NOTICE When unhooking and hooking a sun visor, handle it by the hard plastic parts or the sun visor can be damaged. (1) Card holder You can put a card in the card holder (1) on the back of the sun visor. NOTICE If you park your vehicle outdoors in direct sunlight in hot weather, the inside of the vehicle will become hot. The heat may distort or crack a card. When you park your vehicle outdoors in direct sunlight or in hot weather, do not leave plastic cards in the card holder. 5-4 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Interior light Vanity mirror (if equipped) EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (3) (2) (1) (2) 74LHT0532 (2) Vanity mirror There is a vanity mirror (2) on the back of the sun visor. WARNING • If you use the vanity mirror while driving, you may lose control of the vehicle, resulting in an accident. Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. • If the front airbag is accidentally inflated when you come close to the front airbag location, it could hit you hard and you may get severely injured. When using the vanity mirror, do not come close to the front airbag location or lean against it. 64J104 Interior light switch has three positions which function as described below: ON (1) The light comes on and stays on regardless of whether the door is open or closed. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the keyless push start system or the keyless entry system, the light will automatically be turned off to prevent the battery from discharging when the following conditions are simultaneously met: • The ignition switch is in “LOCK” position, or the ignition mode is “LOCK” (OFF). • The hazard warning lights, the position lights and the headlights are off. – After about 15 minutes of the light on. DOOR (2) • The light comes on while any of the doors (including the tailgate) is opened. For about 15 seconds after all doors are closed, the light will remain on and then fade out. • If all doors are closed, the light comes on for about 15 seconds when the ignition key is pulled out from the ignition switch or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode from “ON” to “LOCK” (OFF).After 15 seconds, the light will fade out. • The light will be automatically turned off to save the battery when the following conditions are simultaneously met. – The ignition switch is in “LOCK” position or the engine switch is in LOCK (OFF) mode. – A period of 15 minutes has elapsed after any of the doors (including the tailgate) is opened and other operations are not done. If you perform any of the following procedures before the light fading out, the light will start to fade out immediately. • Inserting the ignition key into the ignition switch or pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “ACC” or “ON”. • Locking all doors by operating the key, keyless entry transmitter, keyless push start system remote controller, power door locking switch or request switch. 5-5 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT OFF (3) The light remains off even when the door is opened. Accessory socket NOTICE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 81RM05007 81RM05025 NOTE: The number of doors involved in the lighting operation of the interior light depends on the vehicle specification. If there is a switch (rubber protrusion) at the door opening as shown, the door is involved in the lighting operation. The tailgate is also involved in this operation even without the rubber protrusion. The accessory socket will work when the ignition switch is in “ACC” or “ON” position or the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON”. This can be used to provide 12 volt/120 watt/10 ampere power for electrical accessories. WARNING • Use of inappropriate electrical accessories can cause damage to your vehicle’s electrical system. Make sure that any electrical accessories you use are designed to plug into this type of socket. • When the ignition switch is in “LOCK” position or the ignition mode is LOCK(OFF) while using the accessory socket, the following may occur; – the audio or navigation system does not turn off. – the keyless entry system does not work, etc. If they occur, disconnect the item from the accessory socket and check whether the electrical equipments work properly. If the problem persists, ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to have the system inspected. When the accessory socket is not in use, close the rubber cap. If any foreign material enters the accessory socket, it may cause a malfunction or short circuit. Always close the cap on the socket when the socket is not in use. 5-6 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT AUX/USB socket (if equipped) Type A the vehicle’s audio system. Refer to “Audio system” in this section. Glove box EXAMPLE WARNING If foreign material enters the USB socket, a malfunction or a short circuit may occur. Always close the cover when the USB socket is not in use. Assist grips EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 81RM05010 To open the glove box, pull the latch lever. To close it, push the lid until it latches securely. 81RM05008 Type B WARNING AUX TUNE / FLD VOL / PWR MENU DISP/ MODE A 76MH0A072 Assist grips are provided for convenience. NOTICE EXAMPLE 69RM05009 Connect your portable digital music player, etc. to this socket to enjoy music through To avoid damaging the assist grip and the molded headlining, do not hang down the assist grip. Do not leave cigarette lighters or spray cans in the glove box. If a cigarette lighter or spray can is in a place such as the glove box, it may light accidentally causing a fire. CAUTION If you use a storage area with a lid, do not drive the vehicle with the lid open. In acceleration, a sudden braking or an collision, your body may be hit by the lid or the object which falls out from the storage area. 5-7 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Drink holder and storage area Center console tray (1) WARNING EXAMPLE (4) (1) (3) (5) If any object gets caught in the brake pedal or the accelerator pedal, you may not operate the pedal properly, resulting in an accident. If you use a storage area without a lid, do not place the object which may fall out while driving. Front Drink holder (2) Use the front drink holder to put a cup with a lid or a bottle with a cap. Also, you can put small articles in the front drink holder. (2) (3) (4) (5) (4) (1) Center console tray (2) Front drink holder (3) Front bottle holder (4) Front seat back pocket (if equipped) (5) Rear bottle holder 5-8 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT WARNING Be careful and use a lid for a drink not to spill out liquid. Spilling out hot liquid can cause burn injury. In addition, if liquid spills out on the following parts, it may cause a fire or a malfunction and an airbag system may not work properly. – Navigation system, audio system or the relevant switches – Wiring or electrical components under the floor – Moving part of the gearshift lever or the seatbelt buckle Do not allow liquids to spill, splash or spray inside the vehicle. The following items could malfunction, or fire could result. In the case of spilling drinks, etc., promptly consult with a Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop. • SRS airbag system • Audio equipment • Electrical parts such as switches and wiring • Movable parts such as the gearshift lever or seat belt buckles Front bottle holder (3) / Rear bottle holder (5) You should only place a bottle with a cap in the holder. NOTE: Maruti Suzuki recommends to use maximum 1 liter capacity of bottle. Front seat back pocket (4) (if equipped) Footrest A EXAMPLE (1) EXAMPLE 81RM05011 Use the footrest (1) (for driver side only) as a support for your left foot only. 69RH138 This pocket is provided for holding light and soft things such as gloves, newspapers or magazines. CAUTION Do not put hard or breakable objects in the pocket. If an accident occurs, objects such as bottles, cans, etc. can injure the occupants in the rear seat. 5-9 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Luggage compartment cover (if equipped) Frame hooks Front It is not recommend that you use the frame hooks for towing another vehicle. They are originally designed to tow your vehicle in emergency situation. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to “Towing your vehicle” in the “EMERGENCY SERVICE” section. EXAMPLE WARNING EXAMPLE 81RM05012 Luggage or other cargo placed in the luggage compartment is hidden from view by a luggage compartment cover. WARNING Do not carry items on top of the luggage compartment cover, even if they are small and light. Objects on top of the cover could be thrown about in an accident, causing injury, or could obstruct the driver’s rear view. Observe the following instructions when using frame hooks. The towing hook or vehicle body may break and cause serious injury or damage: • Do not use the frame hooks for towing another vehicle. • Avoid pulling the vehicle to get out of severe snowy, muddy or sandy conditions, sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which could cause excessive stress on the towing hook. In such case, we recommend that you contact a professional service. (1) 81RM05013 The towing hook (1) is provided on the front of the vehicle for use in emergency situations only. To install the towing hook (1), jack handle (2) and wheel brace (3) follow the procedure below. EXAMPLE (1) (2) (3) 69RH197 5-10 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1) Pick up the towing hook (1), jack handle (2) and wheel brace (3) that are stowed in luggage compartment. EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (1) (1) (3) (4) 81RM05015 (2) 3) Install the towing hook (1) by hand. 81RM05014 2) Remove the cover (4) by using a jack handle (2) covered with a soft cloth as shown in the illustration. NOTE: Do not use excessive force as it may damage the cover strap. NOTE: We recommend to fasten the cover with tape to prevent damage during towing. 81RM05016 4) To tighten the towing hook (1), turn it clockwise by using a wheel brace (3) until the towing hook (1) is securely installed. WARNING Use extreme caution when you use the towing eye (1). Avoid pulling the vehicle to get out of severe snowy, muddy or sandy conditions, sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would give excessive stress on the towing eye. The towing eye or vehicle body may break and cause serious injury or damage. To remove the towing hook (1), reverse the installation procedure. 5-11 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Rear Towing by Using a Rope EXAMPLE 1) Hang a towing cable on a towing eye horizontally, so that the hanging side would be the same for the towing vehicle and the towed vehicle if possible. 2) Keep the engine running. • When you cannot start the engine, turn the ignition switch to other than "LOCK" position or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to the position other than LOCK (OFF). • Turn the steering wheel to left and right to check that the steering lock is released. (5) 81RM05017 WARNING NOTICE • Your vehicle was originally designed to carry people and a normal amount of cargo, not to tow a trailer. • The frame hook (5) is provided on the rear of the vehicle for use in sea shipping purposes only. Do not use the frame hook for towing another vehicle, being towed by another vehicle or transporting your vehicle by a car carrier trailer, etc. Otherwise, the frame hook or the vehicle body may break and cause serious injury or damage. If you drive the vehicle without the engine running, it may cause an accident. When your vehicle is towed by using a rope, observe the following instructions. • Do not turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” position or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to LOCK (OFF). Otherwise, the steering wheel will be locked and not be turned. • Depress the brake pedal more firmly than usual, as the brake booster does not work. (Continued) WARNING (Continued) • Operate the steering wheel with more force, as the power steering system does not work. NOTICE If you cannot release the steering lock, you cannot operate the steering wheel and it may cause an accident. If you cannot release the steering lock because of malfunction and running out of the lead-acid battery, do not perform towing by using a rope. 3) Shift the gearshift lever into “N”. 4) During towing, make sure that a towing cable is not slack. To avoid a collision, carefully drive your vehicle checking the brake lights of the front vehicle. • To warn the driver of a following vehicle, turn on the hazard warning lights of the towed vehicle. WARNING If you continuously depress the brake pedal on a long or steep downhill slope, the brakes could overheat and become ineffective. When there is a long or steep downhill slope, do not perform towing by a rope. Make a request of a tow truck. 5-12 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT NOTICE • If a strong impact is applied to a towing eye or a towing cable by sudden starting etc., the towing eye or the vehicle body may be damaged. When the vehicle needs to be towed, do not apply a strong impact to a towing eye or a towing cable by sudden starting etc. Do not accelerate suddenly. • If the vehicle unavoidably needs to be towed by a rope, tow your vehicle on paved roads. Do not exceed the vehicle speed of 30 km/h (19 mph) and do not drive the vehicle for longer than 30 km (18 miles) to protect the transmission. 5-13 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Side outlet Heating and air conditioning system (2) EXAMPLE Air outlet 1 EXAMPLE 1 (1) 2 3 3 2 52RS006 4 To open the louver (1), push the arrow part (2) as shown in the illustration. To adjust the direction of the air flow, move up or down or turn the opened louver (1). 4 81RM05018 1. Windshield defroster outlet 2. Side outlet 3. Center outlet 4. Floor outlet 5-14 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Manual heating and air conditioning system Center outlet EXAMPLE Description of controls (3) (2) EXAMPLE (5) (4) 81RM05028 Move the knob (3) vertically or the case (4) horizontally to adjust the direction of airflow as desired. CAUTION Prolonged exposure to hot air from the heater or air conditioner could result in low temperature burns. All vehicle occupants, particularly children, the elderly, those with special needs, individuals with delicate skin, and sleeping individuals, should maintain sufficient distance from the air outlets to prevent prolonged exposure to hot airflow. (3) (4) (1) 81RM05026 Temperature selector (1) This is used to select the temperature by turning the selector. Blower speed selector (2) This is used to turn on the blower and to select blower speed by turning the selector. 5-15 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Air flow selector (3) (c) HEAT & DEFROST (d) BI-LEVEL (b) EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (b) (d) (a) (e) EXAMPLE 81RM05020 This is used to select one of the following functions. Temperature-controlled air comes out of the floor outlets and cooler air comes out of the center and side outlets. When the temperature selector (1) is in the fully cold position or fully hot position, however, the air from the floor outlets and the air from the center and side outlets will be the same temperature. VENTILATION (a) HEAT (c) 75RM022 EXAMPLE 81RM05022 Temperature-controlled air comes out of the floor outlets, the windshield defroster outlets and the side outlets. DEFROST (e) EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 81RM05023 81RM05019 81RM05021 Temperature-controlled air comes out of the center and side air outlets. Temperature-controlled air comes out of the floor outlets and the side outlets, small amount of air also comes out of the windshield defroster outlets. Temperature-controlled air comes out of the windshield defroster outlets and the side outlets. 5-16 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Air intake selector (4) (g) EXAMPLE (f) (6) 81RM05027 FRESH AIR (f) When this mode is selected by moving the lever to right, outside air is used. RECIRCULATED AIR (g) When this mode is selected by moving the lever to left, inside air is recirculated. This mode is suitable when driving through dusty or polluted air such as in a tunnel, or when attempting to quickly cool down the interior or to reduce unwanted odor from entering the vehicle. NOTE: If you select RECIRCULATED AIR for an extended period of time, the air in the vehicle may become contaminated and the windows tend to get misted. Therefore, you should occasionally select FRESH AIR. Less operation of the compressor results in better fuel economy. System operating instructions EXAMPLE This selector is used to select the following modes. During operation of the air conditioner, you may notice slight changes in engine speed. These changes are normal, the system is designed so that the compressor turns on or off to maintain the desired temperature. (3) 75RM403 NOTE: The mark of “ ” (6) To clear fog on the windshield and/or the side windows quickly, set the air flow selector (3) to HEAT & DEFROST or DEFROST and air intake selector (4) to FRESH AIR. These positioning will clear the fogged windshield and/or the side windows faster than the RECIRCULATED AIR. Air conditioning switch (5) To turn on the air conditioning system, set the blower speed selector to a position other than off and push in “A/C” switch. With this “A/C” switch operation, a indicator light will come on when the air conditioning system is on. To turn off the air conditioning system, push “A/C” switch again. Natural ventilation Select VENTILATION and FRESH AIR, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position, and the blower speed selector to off. Fresh air will flow through the vehicle during driving. Forced ventilation The control settings are the same as for natural ventilation except you set the blower speed selector to a position other than off. Normal heating (using outside air) Select HEAT and FRESH AIR, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position and the blower speed selector to the desired blower speed position. Setting the blower speed selector to a higher blower speed position increases heating efficiency. 5-17 69RH0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Quick heating (using recirculated air) The control settings are the same as for normal heating except you select RECIRCULATED AIR. If you use this heating method for an extended period of time, the air in the vehicle may become contaminated and the windows can become misty. Therefore, use this method only for quick heating and change to the normal heating method as soon as possible. Head cooled/Feet warmed heating Select BI-LEVEL and FRESH AIR, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position, and the blower speed selector to the desired blower speed position. Unless the temperature selector is in the fully cold position or fully hot position, the air that comes out of the center and side outlets will be cooler than the air that comes out of the floor outlets. Normal cooling Set the air flow selector to VENTILATION, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position and the blower speed selector to the desired blower speed position, and turn on “A/C” switch. Setting the blower speed selector to a higher blower speed position increases cooling efficiency. You can switch the air intake selector to either FRESH AIR or RECIRCULATED AIR as you desire. Choosing RECIRCULATED AIR increases cooling efficiency. Quick cooling (using recirculated air) The control settings are the same as for normal cooling except you select RECIRCULATED AIR and the highest blower speed. NOTE: • If you select RECIRCULATED AIR for an extended period of time, the air in the vehicle may become contaminated and the windows tend to get misted. Therefore, you should occasionally select FRESH AIR. • If your vehicle has been left in the sun with the windows closed, it will cool faster if you open the windows briefly while you operate the air conditioner with the air intake selector at FRESH AIR and the blower at high speed. Dehumidifying Set the air flow selector to a desired air flow selector position, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position and the blower speed selector to the desired blower speed position. Also select FRESH AIR and turn on “A/C” switch. NOTE: Because the air conditioner dehumidifies the air, turning it on will help keep the windows clear, even when blowing heated air using DEFROST or HEAT & DEFROST functions. EXAMPLE 81RM05024 NOTE: If you need maximum defrosting: • select DEFROST and FRESH AIR, • set the blower speed selector to high, • adjust the temperature selector to the hot end, • turn on “A/C” switch, and • adjust the side outlets so the air blows on the side windows. Maintenance If you do not use the air conditioner for a long period, such as during winter, it may not give the best performance when you start using it again. To help maintain optimum performance and durability of your air conditioner, it needs to be run periodically. Operate the air conditioner at least once a month for one minute with the engine idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil and helps protect the internal components. 5-18 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT If your air conditioner is equipped with air filters, clean or replace them as specified in “Maintenance schedule” in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section. Have this job done by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop as the lower glove box must be lowered for this job. NOTE: Your vehicle uses the air conditioning refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called R-134a. R-134a replaced R-12 around 1993 for automotive applications. Other refrigerants are available, including recycled R-12, but only R-134a should be used in your vehicle. NOTICE Using the wrong refrigerant may damage your air conditioning system. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or replace the R-134a with other refrigerants. Radio antenna EXAMPLE Installation of radio frequency transmitters We recommend that you always ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop about frequency band, max output power, antenna position at vehicle and specific conditions for installation and/or use before installing a radio transmitter in your vehicle. Such equipments may cause the electronic control system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or they are not suited for the vehicle. 69RH201 The radio antenna on the roof is removable. To remove the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To reinstall the antenna, turn it clockwise firmly by hand. NOTE: Adjust the antenna angle to maximum for optimum radio reception. NOTICE To avoid damage to the radio antenna: • Remove the antenna when using an automatic car wash. • Remove the antenna when the antenna hits anything such as a low ceiling in a parking garage or putting a car cover over your vehicle. 5-19 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Audio system (if equipped) EXAMPLE AUX TUNE / FLD VOL / PWR MENU DISP/ MODE 69RM05009 NOTE: For vehicle equipped with SMARTPLAY STUDIO INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM, refer to audio manual available with the vehicle. 5-20 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Safety information WARNING If you pay too much attention to operating the audio system or viewing the audio system display while driving, an accident can occur. If you set the sound volume too loud, it could prevent you from being aware of road and traffic conditions. • Keep your eyes on the road and your mind on the drive. Avoid paying too much attention to operating the audio system or viewing the audio system display. • Familiarize yourself with the audio system controls and operation of the audio system before driving. • Preset your favorite radio stations before driving so that you can quickly tune to them using the presets. • Set the sound volume to a level that will allow you to continue to be aware of road and traffic conditions while driving. NOTICE • Avoid spraying or spilling of clearing solutions, perfumes, car fresheners, beverages, chemicals or any liquids on the audio system surface. Also ensure that any liquid does not enter the system, it can damage the screen and the system. The warranty of the system will be void, if liquid ingress marks are observed inside the system. • Avoid exposure of the audio system to water or excessive moisture as it can cause electric shocks, fire or other damages. Open source definition This Product includes following open source software. mbedtls version 2.5.1 Copyright © 2006–2015, ARM Limited, All Rights Reserved SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE2.0 WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. This file is part of mbed TLS (https:// tls.mbed.org) Please be noted that a portion of this software is made by changing or modifying original source files. The Bluetooth® word mark and logo are registered trademarks and are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Ink. Stop using this unit and a Bluetooth® ready device whenever requested. This unit shares the communication frequency with other private or public wireless communication equipment such as a wireless LAN and other wireless communication radios. You should stop using this unit whenever you are notified that your unit disturbs other wireless communication immediately. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is on an “AS IS” BASIS, 5-21 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Basic operations Turning on/off power Press “VOL/PWR” knob (1) to turn on the power. The unit starts to operate in the previous mode that the power was turned off. • To turn off the power, press and hold “VOL/PWR” knob (1) for about 1 second. (8) EXAMPLE (9) (7) AUX (10) TUNE / FLD VOL / PWR MENU (6) (5) DISP/ (4) (3) Mute • Press “VOL/PWR” knob(1) to mute the sound. • To cancel mute, press any button. MODE (2) (1) 69RM05001 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) Adjusting the volume Turn “VOL/PWR” knob (1). • Turning it clockwise increases the volume. • Turning it counterclockwise decreases the volume. “VOL/PWR” knob “MODE” button MICROPHONE (for handsfree) “DISP/BACK” button “MENU” button “TUNE/FLD” knob USB/AUX SMARTPHONE DOCK CAP* UP button DOWN button * To open SMARTPHONE DOCK CAP (8), use the cap opener provided in MGA “SMARTPHONE DOCK”. Opening of SMARTPHONE DOCK CAP with any external object may cause damage to CAP. NOTE: For the purpose of safe driving, adjust the audio volume to a level that allows you to hear sounds outside of the vehicle including car horns and particularly emergency vehicle sirens. Display & Back setting Press “DISP/BACK” button(4) to go back to the previous display when a list or menu screen is displayed. On long pressing “DISP/BACK” button(4), tuner display will be turned OFF. However all operations such as media playing etc will be active. Display will be turned ON by pressing any button on audio unit, steering switches or any other interrupt such as handsfree calling etc. 5-22 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Sound settings 1) Press “MENU” button (5). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Sound Settings”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select one of the settings as follows, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. Equalizer The equalizer can set various types of sounds depending on the type of music. 1) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Equalizer”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select one of the settings as follows, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. Equalizer Flat Bass Classic Treble Jazz Balance Rock Fader Hip-Hop AVC Pop Speaker Configuration Custom NOTE: • When you select “Custom”, the sound curve can be adjusted as your preference. Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to adjust values of sound, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. • “>> <<” mark appears at both left and right ends of the currently selected equalizer. Adjusting bass/treble/balance/fader 1) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance” or “Fader”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to adjust the sound, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. • “Bass” / “Treble”: – Can be adjusted in levels -6 to 0 to +6. – Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) clockwise to increase the frequency & counter clockwise to decrease the frequency. • “Balance”: – Can be adjusted in 9 level left to right. – Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) clockwise to emphasize the right speaker, and turn the knob (6) counterclockwise to emphasize the left speaker. • “Fader”: – Can be adjusted in 9 level back to front. – Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) clockwise to emphasize the front speaker, and turn the knob (6) counterclockwise to emphasize the rear speaker (if equipped). NOTE: When you adjust to emphasize the rear speakers, sound output may fade out completely in case vehicle is not equipped with rear speakers. 5-23 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume control) The Auto Volume Control (AVC) function automatically adjusts (increases/ decreases) the sound volume in accordance with vehicle speed. The AVC control is provided with four selectable levels (LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The level of volume adjustment increases together with the LEVEL number. 1) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “AVC”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to adjust the level, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. Adjusting the sound parameters as per speaker configuration 1) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Speaker Configuration”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “2SPK” or “4SPK”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. • “2SPK”: Sound is generated from the front speakers. • “4SPK” (if equipped): Sound is generated from the all speakers. System settings 1) Press “MENU” button (5). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “System Settings”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select one of the settings as follows, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. Beep Security Initialize Vehicle Alerts Reverse Warning Priority Auto Scroll RDS SmartPhone APP Beep on/off Beep sound is activated when error message is displayed or during operations of few button. Beep setting can be turned on or off through the following steps: 1) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Beep”. 2) Press “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “ON” or “OFF”. Security setting Refer to “Anti-theft feature” later in this section. Initialize setting You can delete the registered Bluetooth® device information. 1) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Initialize”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Reset BT”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “YES”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection for reseting. NOTE: For optimal sound experience, ensure that speaker configuration is selected as per the actual speakers present in the vehicle. 5-24 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Vehicle alerts setting You can turn on or off the warning indications related to vehicle system using this setting. By default, this setting is ON for all alerts. 1) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Vehicle Alerts”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select one of the settings as follows, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. Parking Brake Engaged Seat Belt Open Door Open Low Fuel 3) Press “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “ON” or “OFF”. 4) Following are the warning display related to vehicle system: • “Parking Brake Engaged”: This message will appear when the vehicle is moved without releasing the parking brake. Check that parking brake is fully released. • “Seat Belt Open”: This message will appear when the vehicle is moving and driver has not fastened his seat belt. • “Door Open”: This message will appear when any door (except tailgate) is open when the vehicle is moving. • “Low Fuel”: This message will appear to remind to fill the fuel. Fill the fuel immediately. NOTE: If you push “DISP/BACK” button (4) while the warning and indicator messages is displayed, the indication will disappear. Reverse warning priority setting On applying reverse, volume of audio system gets lowered. By default, this setting is ON. This setting can be turned on or off through the following steps: 1) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Reverse Warning Priority”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “No” or “Yes”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. Auto scroll setting Auto scroll setting is ON by default. When playing the media files, if the files text contains more characters, “>” mark will appear at the right end up the display screen and the display changes to the next set of characters automatically. 1) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Auto Scroll”. 2) Press “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “ON” or “OFF”. RDS (Radio Data System) setting Enabling this setting displays the messages transmitted by FM station. This setting is ON by default. You can choose to turn ON/OFF this setting through the following steps: 1) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “RDS”. 2) Press “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “ON” or “OFF”. NOTE: • Messages are displayed only when RDS signal is included in FM radio waves. • The messages are displayed program service name only. Smartphone app setting Refer to section 5-49 for details about smartphone application. Smartphone app can be used only when app setting is enable as ON. Refer to “Suzuki Smartplay Dock application” later in this section for details. 1) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “SmartPhone APP”. 2) Press “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “ON” or “OFF”. NOTE: An Apple device can be connected in either Bluetooth® or iPod mode. Bluetooth® mode has higher priority over iPod Mode. In case, you want to connect the Apple device on iPod mode instead and change Smartphone app setting to “OFF”. 5-25 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Listening to the radio EXAMPLE (1) AUX VOL / PWR MENU (4) DISP/ UP button DOWN button “MODE” button “TUNE/FLD” knob (A) (B) (C) (D) Frequency Band Auto store mode indication RDS data NOTE: Radio Reception Radio reception can be affected by environment, atmospheric conditions, or radio signal’s power and distance from the station. Nearby mountains and buildings may interfere or deflect radio reception, causing poor reception. Poor reception or radio static can also be caused by electric current from overhead wires or high voltage power lines. (2) TUNE / FLD (1) (2) (3) (4) MODE (3) 69RH145 Display (B) (C) (A) EXAMPLE (D) 69RM05002 5-26 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Selecting the band 1) Press and hold “MODE” button (3) to change to the list of available modes. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (4) to select “FM” or “AM”, and press the knob (4) to determine the selection. NOTE: You can also switch the display in sequence by short pressing the “MODE” button (3). Seek tuning Press and hold UP button (1) or DOWN button (2) to start searching. The unit stops searching for a station at a frequency where a broadcast station is available. Manual tuning Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (4). The frequency being received is displayed. Preset memory 1) Tune to the desired station. 2) Press “TUNE/FLD” knob (4) to change the display to the preset channel list. 3) To store the station, turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (4) to select one of the channels, and press and hold the knob (4) to determine the selection. 4) To select station from the preset channel list, press “TUNE/FLD” knob (4) to change the display to the preset channel list. Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (4) to select one of the channels, and press the knob (4) to determine the selection. NOTE: 12 stations can be stored for FM, and 6 stations can be stored for AM. In case a station is stored over an existing preset station, previous data will be overridden. Auto store 1) Press and hold “TUNE/FLD” knob (4) to start searching when in FM/AM mode. Some stations in good reception will automatically be stored to preset channel list in order, starting from a station whose frequency is the lowest. 2) To select station from the preset channel list, press “TUNE/FLD” knob (4) to change the display to the preset channel list while auto store mode indication (C) is displayed. NOTE: • Auto Store can be cancelled by pressing the “DISP/BACK” button. • When the auto store is performed, the station previously stored in the memory at the position is overwritten. • 6 stations can be preset for FM-AS, and 6 stations can be preset for AM-AS in auto store mode. 5-27 69RH0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Listening to files stored in a USB device (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) EXAMPLE (A) Track number (B) Play time (C) Current Active track information (if supported by audio device) (D) Repeat/Random status Indication (1) AUX (2) TUNE / FLD NOTICE VOL / PWR MENU (6) (5) DISP/ (4) UP button DOWN button “MODE” button “DISP/BACK” button “MENU” button “TUNE/FLD” knob MODE (3) 69RH146 Do not connect any USB device other than a USB memory or a USB audio player. Do not connect multiple USB devices to the USB connector using a USB hub, etc. Supplying power to multiple USB devices from the connector could cause overheating, smoke and permanent damage to audio system. Display (A) (D) EXAMPLE (B) (C) 69RM05003 5-28 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Selecting a USB device mode 1) Press and hold “MODE” button (3) to change the display. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “USB”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. NOTE: You can also switch the display in sequence by short pressing the “MODE” button (3). Selecting a folder Press twice “TUNE/FLD” (6) knob and then turn “TUNE/FLD” (6) to select the desired folder. Selecting a track • Press UP button (1) to listen to the next track. • Press DOWN button (2) twice to listen to the previous track. When DOWN button (2) is pressed once, the track currently being played will start from the beginning again. Repeat playback 1) Press and hold “MENU” button (5) to change the display. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Repeat”. 3) Press and rotate “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select one of the settings as below and then press “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to determine selection. Random playback 1) Press and hold “MENU” button (5) to change the display. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Random”. 3) Press and rotate “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select one of the settings as below and then press “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to determine selection. OFF OFF FILE FOLDER FOLDER ALL • FILE The track currently being played will be played repeatedly. • FOLDER All the tracks in the folder currently selected will be played repeatedly. • FOLDER The tracks in the currently selected folder will be played in random order. • ALL The tracks in the connected USB device will be played in random order. Fast forwarding/rewinding a track • Press and hold UP button (1) to fast forward the track. • Press and hold DOWN button (2) to fast rewind the track. • Releasing the button can stop the fast forwarding/rewinding. 5-29 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Display change Press “DISP/BACK” button (4). Each time the button is pressed, display will change as follows: Folder name / Track title File name / Track title Album name (MP3, AAC only) / Track title Artist name / Track title NOTE: • “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there is no text information in the file currently being played. • If text data contains more characters than the display area, “>” mark will appear at the right end. Notes on USB device Compatible USB devices • USB mass storage class For details as to whether your USB memory/USB audio is compatible with USB mass storage class, please contact the USB memory/USB audio manufacturer. • Audio file MP3 (.mp3) / WMA (.wma) / AAC (.m4a) / AAC (.aac) • File system FAT 16/32, VFAT (supporting long file name) • USB standard compatibility 1.1/2.0 full speed • Maximum current less than 2.1 A • If a USB hub or extension cable is connected to the audio system, it may not be recognized. In this case, directly connect the USB device to the audio system. • Devices such as MP3 players/mobile phones/digital cameras may not be recognized as audio systems for playing music and 'USB READ ERROR' message may be displayed. USB device connection • When connecting a USB device, make sure that the connector is pushed all the way into the port present on audio system. • Depending on the USB flash drive that you are using, (non-brand product, USB flash drive that has been externally damaged) it may disable connection or cause unstable operation. • Do not leave the USB device for long periods of time in places inside the vehicle where the temperature can rise too high. • Back up any important data beforehand. We cannot accept responsibility for any lost data. • It is recommended not to connect a USB device that contains data files other than MP3/WMA format. Playing MP3/WMA/AAC files on a USB device • Playback or display may not be possible depending on the type of USB device in use or the condition of the recording. • Depending on the connected USB memory, the files may be played in different order from the order that the files were stored. • The DRM (Digital Rights Management) file cannot be played. 5-30 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Compatible compression formats MP3 • Bit rate MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 up to 320 kbps MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 up to 160 kbps MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 up to 160 kbps VBR: up to 384 kbps (MAX.) • Sampling frequency MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32/44.1/48 kHz MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16/22.05/24 kHz MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8/11.025/12 kHz • Channel Stereo/Joint stereo/Dual channel/ Monaural • ID3 tag ID3v1.x/ID3v2.x Maximum number of files/folders • Maximum number of files: 2500 • Maximum number of files in a folder: 255 • Maximum number of folders: 255 – Root folder and empty folder are included. • Maximum depth of tree structure: 8 NOTICE Never use “.mp3”, “.wma” or “.m4a” as a file name extension if it is not in the MP3/WMA/AAC format file. Failure to observe this may result in damage to the speaker due to noise production. WMA • Windows Media Audio Ver.7/Ver.8/Ver.9 Standard compliant • Bit rate: 32 up to 320 kbps • VBR: up to 384 kbps (MAX.) • Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz • WMA tag: Ver.8.0 • Channel: 2 Channels AAC • Bit rate: 16 up to 320 kbps • VBR: up to 320 kbps (MAX.) • Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz • AAC tag: iTunes m4a metadata 5-31 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Listening to an iPod® (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) EXAMPLE (A) Track number (B) Play time (C) Current Active track information (if supported by audio device) (1) AUX (2) TUNE / FLD (6) Selecting an iPod mode 1) Press and hold “MODE” button (3) to change the display. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “iPod®”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. VOL / PWR MENU (5) DISP/ (4) UP button DOWN button “MODE” button “DISP/BACK” button “MENU” button “TUNE/FLD” knob MODE NOTE: You can also switch the display in sequence by short pressing the “MODE” button (3). (3) 69RH146 Display (A) EXAMPLE (B) (C) Selecting a track • Press UP button (1) to listen to the next track. • Press DOWN button (2) twice to listen to the previous track. When DOWN button (2) is pressed once, the track currently being played will start from the beginning again. 69RH159 5-32 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Fast forwarding/rewinding a track • Press and hold UP button (1) to fast forward the track. • Press and hold DOWN button (2) to fast rewind the track. • Releasing the button can stop the fast forwarding/rewinding. Repeat playback 1) Press and hold “MENU” button (5) to change the display. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Repeat”. 3) Press “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select one of the settings as follows. OFF FOLDER SONG • FOLDER All the tracks in the folder currently selected will be played repeatedly. • SONG The track currently being played will be played repeatedly. NOTE: Settings may be displayed depending on the model of iPod®. Random playback 1) Press and hold “MENU” button (5) to change the display. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Random”. 3) Press “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select one of the settings as follows. Display change Press “DISP/BACK” button (4). Each time the button is pressed, display will change as follows: Playlist name /Track title (Playlist mode only) OFF Artist name / Track title SONG Album name / Track title • SONG The tracks in the iPod will be played in random order. NOTE: Settings may be displayed depending on the model of iPod®. Genre / Track title NOTE: • “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there is no text information in the file currently being played. • If text data contains more characters than the display area, “>” mark will appear at the right end. Selecting a category Categories such as Artist, Album, Podcast, Genre, Audiobook, Playlist, Song may be displayed depending on the model of iPod®. 1) Press and hold “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to change the display. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select one of the categories, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. 5-33 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Notes on iPod®/iPhone® Made for iPod®/iPhone® • iPod® touch (6th generation)* • iPod® touch (5th generation)* • iPod® nano (7th generation)* • iPhone® 8 Plus • iPhone® 8 • iPhone® 7 Plus • iPhone® 7 • iPhone® SE • iPhone® 6s Plus • iPhone® 6s • iPhone® 6 Plus • iPhone® 6 • iPhone® 5s • iPhone® 5c • iPhone® 5 * Some functions may not be available depending on the model of iPod®. iPod® 69RH201 • Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to connect specifically to the Apple product(s) identified in the badge, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. • Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may affect wireless performance. • Apple, iPod touch, iPod nano, iPhone, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. NOTE: Please do not connect iPod® accessory such as iPod® remote control or headphones while connecting the iPod® with the unit. Unit may not operate correctly. 5-34 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT AUX function Display EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 69RH160 (1) TUNE / FLD VOL / PWR MENU (3) AUX connection To listen to auxiliary audio sources (sold separately) through the unit, follow the instruction below. 1) Connect the auxiliary audio source to the AUX socket (1) with an AUX cable. 2) Press and hold “MODE” button (2) to change the display. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (3) to select “AUX”, and press the knob (3) to determine the selection. DISP/ MODE (2) 69RH147 (1) AUX socket (2) “MODE” button (3) “TUNE/FLD” knob NOTE: You can also switch the display in sequence by short pressing the “MODE” button (2). 5-35 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT CAUTION • Before connection, mute the unit, and also keep the volume of the auxiliary audio source within a range that will not cause distortion. • When the audio source is turned off, noise may be emitted. Be sure to turn off the unit or switch to another mode before turning off the audio source. NOTE: • Please consult your place of purchase for details about whether a given auxiliary audio source can be connected and the proper auxiliary cord to use. • The volume and tone controls of the auxiliary audio source can be adjusted on the unit. • In AUX mode, the volume which is set is different from another mode. 5-36 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Setting of Bluetooth® devices Steering switch (if equipped) EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (1) (4) AUX TUNE / FLD (6) VOL / PWR 69RM05004 MENU (5) (4) (3) DISP/ (2) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) MODE (1) 69RH185 OFF HOOK button “DISP/BACK” button “MENU” button ON HOOK button “TUNE/FLD” knob Bluetooth® setting button WARNING Do not register or set the Bluetooth® device while driving. Stop your vehicle in a safe area before registering the device. Bluetooth® related settings can be entered only when the vehicle is in stationary condition. 5-37 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Registration of Bluetooth® devices To use Bluetooth® devices (Bluetooth® audio or mobile phone) on the audio system, it is required to register the Bluetooth® devices to the audio system. Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices can be registered. NOTE: • Certain functions cannot be used depending on the Bluetooth® device. • Refer to the instruction manual of your Bluetooth® device regarding the operation method of Bluetooth®. • If the pairing cannot be established, the connection operation is canceled. For the Bluetooth® device pairing method, refer to the instruction manual of your Bluetooth® device or try pairing again. 1) Press “MENU” button (3). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Bluetooth Settings”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Pairing”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Name & Passkey”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. NOTE: If you have no Bluetooth® device to be registered, you can also switch the display to “Pairing Name” and “Passkey” at once by pressing the Bluetooth® setting button (6), OFF HOOK button (1) or ON HOOK button (4). 5) Operate and register the Bluetooth® device. Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) incompatible Bluetooth® device: Enter the passkey into the Bluetooth® device. Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) compatible Bluetooth® device: Select “Yes” to register the Bluetooth® device. It is possible to automatically register devices depending on the type of Bluetooth® device. NOTE: If the Bluetooth® device contains music player and mobile phone function, both functions will be registered simultaneously. When deleting a Bluetooth® device, both functions will be deleted simultaneously. Selection from the Bluetooth® phone list The list of paired mobile phones is displayed and the various settings can be changed. 1) Press “MENU” button (3). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Bluetooth Settings”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Pairing”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. NOTE: If you have the mobile phone which currently connected, you can also switch the display to “Pairing” at once by pressing the Bluetooth® setting button (6). 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Pairing Phone List”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select one of the registered mobile phones, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. NOTE: “>>” mark appears at the left end of the currently connected mobile phone. 6) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select one of the settings as follows, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. • “Connect”: Connect a registered mobile phone. • “Disconnect”: Disconnect a registered mobile phone. • “Delete”: Delete a registered mobile phone. NOTE: If a device is deleted from phone list, it will be deleted from audio list as well. 5-38 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Selection from the Bluetooth® audio list The list of paired Bluetooth® audio is displayed and the various settings can be changed. 1) Press “MENU” button (3). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Bluetooth Settings”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Pairing”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. NOTE: If you have the Bluetooth® audio which currently connected, you can also switch the display to “Pairing” at once by pressing the Bluetooth® setting button (6). 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Pairing Audio List”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select one of the registered Bluetooth® audio devices, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. NOTE: “>>” mark appears at the left end of the currently connected Bluetooth® audio. 6) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select one of the settings as follows, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. • “Connect”: Connect a registered Bluetooth® audio. • “Disconnect”: Disconnect a registered Bluetooth® audio. • “Delete”: Delete a registered Bluetooth® audio. NOTE: If a device is deleted from audio list, it will be deleted from phone list as well. Managing paired devices The devices paired with the audio unit can be managed from the “Bluetooth® settings” screen. You can connect one Bluetooth® device as audio and another Bluetooth® device as phone from registered Bluetooth® devices simultaneously. Change of passkey 1) Press “MENU” button (3). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Bluetooth Settings”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Pairing”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. NOTE: If you have the Bluetooth® device which currently connected, you can also switch the display to “Pairing” at once by pressing the Bluetooth® setting button (6). 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Edit Passkey”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select a number for the first digit, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. Select and determine numbers for from the second to fourth digits in order in the same manner. 6) Press “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to determine the passkey setting. Automatic connection with the Bluetooth® device If the “BT Power” is set to “ON”, turning the ignition switch to “ON” position will automatically connect the registered Bluetooth® device. • With the automatic connection, the Bluetooth® device that was connected last will be prioritized. 1) Press “MENU” button (3). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Bluetooth Settings”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Initial Settings”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “BT Power”. 5) Press “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “ON” or “OFF”. NOTE: • When “BT Power” is set to “OFF”, the audio system disconnects from the registered Bluetooth® device. 5-39 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT • If “BT Power” is set to “OFF”, the audio system will not automatically reconnect the next time the ignition is switched on. The device status will be displayed 1) Press “MENU” button (3). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Bluetooth Settings”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Pairing”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. NOTE: If you have the Bluetooth® device which currently connected, you can also switch the display to “Pairing” at once by pressing the Bluetooth® setting button (6). 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Device Information”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. The device name and address will be displayed. 1) Press “MENU” button (3). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Bluetooth Settings”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Initial Settings”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “Initialize BT”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (5) to select “YES”, and press the knob (5) to determine the selection. • Items to be initialized: – BT Power – Talk Volume – Ring Volume Notes on Bluetooth® Initialize Bluetooth® settings It is possible to initialize the Bluetooth® settings. CAUTION • Do not initialize the settings while driving. Stop your vehicle in a safe area before initializing the device. • Initialize with caution. Initialized settings cannot be restored. 73R0209 Bluetooth® • The word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. This telecommunication equipment con- forms to the requirements of the National Telecommunications Commission. • Stop using this unit and a Bluetooth® ready device whenever requested. This unit shares the communication frequency with other private or public wireless communication equipment such as a wireless LAN and other wireless communication radios. You should stop using this unit immediately whenever you are notified that your unit disturbs other wireless communication. Profile • SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) • PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) • OPP (Object Push Profile) • HFP (Hand-Free Profile) • A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) • AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) • SPP (Serial Port Profile) NOTE: • After the Audio system is turned ON, it takes a few seconds to detect and set up Bluetooth® related settings. • For Bluetooth related issues, unpair, restart your smartphone and try again. 5-40 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Bluetooth® hands-free Steering switch (if equipped) EXAMPLE (8) EXAMPLE (9) (10) (11) (12) AUX TUNE / FLD VOL / PWR MENU (7) (6) (5) DISP/ (4) (3) MODE 69RH188 (2) (1) 69RH187 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) “VOL/PWR” knob OFF HOOK button (on audio) Microphone “DISP/BACK” button “MENU” button ON HOOK button (on audio) “TUNE/FLD” knob Volume button Mute button OFF HOOK button (on steering wheel) ON HOOK button (on steering wheel) Bluetooth® setting button 5-41 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT NOTICE • Do not leave your mobile phone inside your vehicle. If the temperature inside the vehicle increases, it may damage your mobile phone. • When disposing your vehicle, make sure to delete all personal information saved to the audio system. • The following hands-free data must be deleted from the audio system. – Speed dial – Reception history/Incoming call history – Bluetooth® phonebook data NOTE: • Please keep your phone volume low. The person’s voice who you are talking to may be heard outside of the vehicle and increase the voice echo. When talking on the phone, speak clearly towards the microphone. • In the following cases, your voice may not be heard clearly by the person on the other line: – When driving on unpaved roads. (If there is loud traffic noise.) – When driving at high speeds. – When driving with the window open. – If the air conditioner is blowing directly towards the microphone. – When the sound of the air conditioner fan is loud. • • • • • • • • – When there is an adverse effect to the sound quality of the phone or network that you are using. The audio system may not function under the following conditions. – When the phone power is not turned on. – When the mobile phone is out of service. – When the mobile phone is not connected. – When the mobile phone battery is low The Bluetooth®’s hands-free operation is dependent upon the mobile phone’s compatibility. The Bluetooth®’s hands-free performance is affected by the driving conditions of mobile phone networks, handsets and vehicles. The audio system’s performance may be restricted due to the model of your mobile phone. Bluetooth®, phone battery level and network signal strength status are displayed only when a phone is connected to the system. The information depends on status received from the phone. The call, contact synchronization action is controlled from the smartphone. To use the hands-free function with this unit, it is required to register the phone in advance It is possible to register a mobile phone and register the phone number to the audio system as follows: • Up to 1,000 phone numbers can be saved for every registered mobile phone. • Up to 30 phone numbers of the latest calls can be stored. (30 calls including missed, received and dialed call). – When the call history exceeds 30 calls, they are deleted from the oldest one first, and the latest call history information is displayed in descending order. • Up to 6 phone numbers can be saved to the speed dial list. • When attempts to establish the pairing fail within 60 seconds, the connecting operation will be canceled. Try to establish the pairing again or refer to the manual of the phone in use for how to establish the pairing with the phone. Answer the phone Press OFF HOOK button (2) or (10). • When you press the ON HOOK button (6) or (11) during an incoming call, you can block the call. (Only for compatible phone units) 5-42 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT NOTE: • If you receive a call from a registered phone, the caller’s name will appear on the screen. • If you receive a call from an unregistered phone, only the caller’s phone number will appear on the screen. Hang up the phone When the call is finished, press the ON HOOK button (6) or (11). Call waiting When a phone call is interrupted by a second call, it is possible to hold the current call and answer the other incoming call. To talk to incoming call: • Press the OFF HOOK button (10) or (2). The current call will be put on hold. • Every time you press OFF HOOK button (10) or (2), the phone call will be switched to the call which was put on hold. • When the current call is completed, the call which was put on hold will connect. To refuse the incoming call: • Press the ON-HOOK button (11) or (6). NOTE: This function can only be used with phone units that are compatible with call waiting. Move call to Private mode If you wish to move a call to private mode, press the “DISP/BACK” button (4). To move the call back to Handsfree mode, press the OFF/ON hook button. Move call to Handsfree mode If you wish to move the call back to Handsfree Mode, press the “ON/OFF HOOK” button. Mute the reception volume Press “VOL/PWR” knob (1) or mute button (9). • To deactivate the mute volume, press “VOL/PWR” knob (1) or mute button (9) again. Adjust the reception volume • Turn “VOL/PWR” knob (1) during a call. Turning it clockwise increases the volume; turning it counterclockwise decreases the volume. • Press volume button (8) during a call. Pressing the button up increases the volume; pressing the button down decreases the volume. NOTE: The volume and microphone sensitivity settings vary depending on the specifications of each mobile phone. Adjust the ringtone volume • Turn “VOL/PWR” knob (1) during an incoming call. Turning it clockwise increases the volume; turning it counterclockwise decreases the volume. • Press volume button (8) during an incoming call. Pressing the button up increases the volume; pressing the button down decreases the volume. Adjust the volume with the Bluetooth® settings 1) Press “MENU” button (5). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Bluetooth Settings”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Initial Settings”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Talk volume” or “Ring volume”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to adjust the volume, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. Make a call Press the OFF HOOK button (2) or (10) to enter the telephone mode. Use the phonebook 1) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Contacts”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 5-43 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select the desired initials, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select the desired name, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select the desired phone number, and press the knob (7) or OFF HOOK button (2) or (10). Use the call history 1) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Call Log”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “All”, “Missed”, “Dialed” or “Received”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select the desired name or phone number, and press the knob (7) or OFF HOOK button (2) or (10). Use the speed dial 1) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Speed Dial”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select the desired name or phone number, and press the knob (7) or OFF HOOK button (2) or (10). NOTE: Speed dial numbers must be registered before this function can be used. Transfer all contacts from your mobile phone 1) Press “MENU” button (5). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Bluetooth Settings”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Dial”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Setup Contacts”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Overwrite”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 6) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “YES”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. Delete the registered phonebook 1) Press “MENU” button (5). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Bluetooth Settings”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Dial”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Setup Contacts”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Delete Contacts”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 6) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “YES”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. Delete the call history 1) Press “MENU” button (5). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Bluetooth Settings”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Dial”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Setup Contacts”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Delete Call Log”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 6) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “YES”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. Registration in speed dial 1) Press “MENU” button (5). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Bluetooth Settings”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Dial”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Add Speed Dial”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 5-44 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Add/Modify”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 6) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select the desired speed dial number, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 7) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select the desired initials, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 8) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select the desired name, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 9) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select the desired Phone number, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 10)Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “YES”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. Deletion of speed dial 1) Press “MENU” button (5). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Bluetooth Settings”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Dial”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Add Speed Dial”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Delete”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 6) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Delete All” or “Delete Contact”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. • If you select “Delete Contact”, select the name for delete. 7) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “YES”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. Automatic transfer of the phonebook/ call history When registering the mobile phone, you can select to automatically transfer the phonebook and call history from your device each time after phone is connected. Select according to the following steps. 1) Press “MENU” button (5). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Bluetooth Settings”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Dial”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Setup Contacts”, and press the knob (7) to determine the selection. 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “Auto Transfer”. 6) Press “TUNE/FLD” knob (7) to select “ON” or “OFF”. 5-45 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Bluetooth® audio (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) EXAMPLE (A) Track number (B) Play time (C) Text information display (1) AUX VOL / PWR MENU (6) NOTE: Some functions may not be usable on some Bluetooth® devices. (2) TUNE / FLD (5) DISP/ (4) Selecting Bluetooth® audio mode 1) Press and hold “MODE” button (3) to change the display. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Bluetooth”, and press the knob (6) to determine the selection. MODE (3) 69RH146 Display (A) EXAMPLE (B) UP button DOWN button “MODE” button “DISP/BACK” button “MENU” button “TUNE/FLD” knob NOTE: You can also switch the display in sequence by short pressing the “MODE” button (3). Selecting a group (only for supported models) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select a group. (C) 69RH161 5-46 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Selecting a track • Press UP button (1) to listen to the next track. • Press DOWN button (2) twice to listen to the previous track. When DOWN button (2) is pressed once, the track currently being played will start from the beginning again. Fast forwarding/rewinding a track • Press and hold UP button (1) to fast forward the track. • Press and hold down DOWN button (2) to fast rewind the track. • Releasing the button can stop the fast forwarding/rewinding. NOTE: Fast forwarding and fast rewinding function can be performed only if it is supported by the player in which the track is being played. Repeat playback (if supported by device) 1) Press and hold “MENU” button (5) to change the display. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Repeat”. 3) Press and then turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select one of the settings as below and press “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) again to determine the selection. OFF SONG GROUP • SONG The track currently being played will be played repeatedly. • GROUP All the tracks in the group currently selected will be played repeatedly. NOTE: Settings may be displayed depending on the Bluetooth® device. Random playback (if supported by device) 1) Press and hold “MENU” button (5) to change the display. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select “Random”. 3) Press “TUNE/FLD” knob (6) to select one of the settings as follows. OFF • GROUP The tracks in the currently selected group will be played in random order. • ALL The tracks in the connected device will be played in random order. NOTE: Settings may be displayed depending on the Bluetooth® device. Display change Press “DISP/BACK” button (4). Each time the button is pressed, display will change as follows: Track name / Song name Artist name / Song name Album name / Song name NOTE: • “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there is no text information in the device currently being played. • If text data contains more characters than the display area, “>” mark will appear at the right end. GROUP ALL 5-47 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Disclaimer for Bluetooth® function • Depending on the mobile phone models, some phones may not be compatible fully or partially (some function may be restricted). • Media playback and handsfree calling through third-party applications is not guaranteed and may have limited support. • Playback, display contents, connectivity or voice quality etc. may get affected depending on circumstances. • After the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position the audio system takes few seconds to detect and connect to the Bluetooth® device (if already paired). • Make sure that you are aware of all applicable local laws and accordingly use Bluetooth® device. Steering switch (if equipped) Use the steering wheel button to operate the basic functions of the audio system. EXAMPLE (2) (4) (1) (2) “MODE” button (1) Each time the button is pressed, the mode will change as follows: FM AM USB (iPod®) (if equipped) Bluetooth® (3) AUX (if equipped) 69RH142 (1) “MODE” button (2) Selection button – Selecting the radio station – Selecting the track (USB (iPod®), Bluetooth® audio mode) (3) Mute button (4) Volume button Selection button (2) • FM, AM mode: – Press “>” to transfer to the next preset channel. – Press “<” to transfer to the previous preset channel. – Press “>” for 1 second or longer, it will search for receivable stations at a high frequency. – Press “<” for 1 second or longer, it will search for receivable stations at a low frequency. • USB (iPod®), Bluetooth® audio mode: – Press “>” to transfer to the next song. With the folder operation mode, it will transfer to the next folder. 5-48 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT – Press “<” to return to the beginning of the currently playing song. Pressing it twice consecutively will return to the previous song. With the folder operation mode, it will return to the previous folder. – Press “>” for 1 second or longer to fast-forward the song. When the button is released, it will stop fast-forwarding. – Press “<” for 1 second or longer to rewind the song. Releasing the button can stop rewinding. Mute button (3) • Hands-free/iPod® mode: Each time you press the button the mute will switch from ON/OFF. • USB mode: Press the button during playback to temporarily stop the playback. Volume button (4) • Hands-free mode: – Press “+” during an outgoing or ingoing call, the reception/ringtone sound will increase. – Press “–” during an outgoing or ingoing call, the reception/ringtone sound will decrease. – Press “+” during an outgoing call, the ringtone sound will increase. – Press “–” during an outgoing call, the ringtone sound will decrease. • Radio, USB (iPod®), Bluetooth® audio, AUX mode: – Press “+”, the volume will increase. – Press “–”, the volume will decrease. 5-49 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Anti-theft feature Display EXAMPLE 69RH162 AUX TUNE / FLD VOL / PWR MENU (1) (2) DISP/ MODE (3) 69RH150 (1) “TUNE/FLD” knob (2) “MENU” button (3) “DISP/BACK” button The anti-theft function is intended to discourage thefts, such as that the audio system becomes inoperable when it is installed on other vehicles. This function works by entering a Personal Identification Number (PIN). When the unit is disconnected from its power source, such as when the audio system is removed or the battery is disconnected, the unit will become inoperable until the PIN is reentered. Setting the anti-theft function 1) Press “MENU” button (2). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (1) to select “System Settings”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (1) to select “Security”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (1) to select “ON”, and press the knob (1). “----” will be displayed. 5) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered as PIN by turning and pressing the “TUNE/FLD” knob (1). 6) After entering 4-digit number, press “TUNE/FLD” knob (1) on “Enter” indication. “Do you want to set XXXX as password” will be displayed. 7) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (1) to select “YES”, and press the knob (1). “XXXX is set as password” will be displayed and the anti-theft function will be set. NOTE: Take a note of the registered PIN and keep it for the future use. 5-50 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Canceling the anti-theft feature To cancel the anti-theft function, delete the registered PIN. 1) Press “MENU” button (2). Setup menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (1) to select “System Settings”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (1) to select “Security”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD” knob (1) to select “OFF”, and press the knob (1). “----” will be displayed. 5) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered as PIN by turning and pressing the “TUNE/FLD” knob (1). 6) After entering 4-digit number, press “TUNE/FLD” knob (1) on “Enter” indication. The anti-theft function will be canceled. NOTE: To change your PIN, first delete your current PIN, and then set a new one. Confirming the Personal Identification Number (PIN) When the main power source is disconnected such as when the battery is replaced, etc, it is required to enter the PIN to make the unit operable again. 1) Set the ignition switch to “ACC” position. “SECURITY” will be displayed. 2) Press “TUNE/FLD” knob (1). “----” will be displayed. 3) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered as PIN by turning and pressing the “TUNE/FLD” knob (1). 4) Press and hold “TUNE/FLD” knob (1) for a while. When the same PIN as registered is entered, the power of the audio system will be turned off automatically and it will become operable again. NOTE: If an incorrect PIN is entered, “ERROR” and the total number of incorrect entry attempts will be displayed. If an incorrect PIN is entered 10 times or more, “Contact Dealer” will be displayed and the audio system will become inoperable. “Suzuki Smartplay Dock” application “Suzuki Smartplay Dock” is an application that allows: • To control the audio system • Access smartphone features such as calling & messaging. • Access vehicle information such as Instantaneous & average fuel consumption, history (last 5 driving cycle & last 5 refuel cycle) fuel consumption, driving range & alerts. EXAMPLE 69RM05008 This application can be downloaded on smartphone through Google Play store or Apple App Store. 5-51 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT WARNING While driving, ensure adherence to all traffic regulations. Insufficient attention to the road and traffic may cause an accident. It is recommended to familiarize with the tutorial section of application before actual usage. In vehicle running condition, the application can be used in landscape mode only. merely provides the option to display and operate these applications. • If many apps are installed, your smartphone might work slowly. • For information on using smartphone applications, please read your smartphone instruction manual. NOTE: • For further information on compatible phones and application download process, please refer to MARUTI SUZUKI website. • Application is compatible with smartphones supporting iOS version 9.0, Android OS 5.0 and above. • Since this audio allows pairing of 2 devices on Bluetooth® simultaneously, application is supported on the phone which is paired through handsfree profile. • Application services are subject to change. It is recommended to install the latest updates for optimal experience. • Application functioning is dependent on mobile data carrier and smartphone hardware, OS performance. • The smartphone manufacturers are responsible for the content and functions of smartphone applications. The device 5-52 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Troubleshooting When encountering a problem, check and follow the instructions below. If the described suggestions do not solve the problem, it is recommended to take the unit to a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. Problem Possible cause Possible solution Common Unable to operate The security function is on. When “SECURITY” is displayed, enter the PIN. When “Contact Dealer” is displayed, contact a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. Unable to turn on the power (No sound is produced) Fuse is blown. Contact a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. Much noise It may not be exactly tuned in to the station. Tune it in exactly to the station. Unable to receive by auto tuning There may be no station emitting signals powerful enough. Pick up a station by manual tuning. There is no supported format file to play on this unit. Check the file format. The current consumption of the USB device exceeds 2.1 A. Use a USB device with a current consumption lower than 2.1 A. Sound skipping may occur when playing VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files. It is not recommended to play VBR files. Radio USB Playback does not start when the USB device is connected Sound skips or noise produced 5-53 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Display Possible solution Display The distance between this unit and the Bluetooth® ready device is too far, or a metallic object may be located between the Bluetooth® ready device and this unit. Change the location of the Bluetooth® ready device. Bluetooth® Pairing failed Bluetooth® The function of the ready device is off. Bluetooth® Refer to the manual of the Bluetooth® ready device. (Some devices have the power saving function that automatically activates after a certain time.) Unable to receive a call Your current location may be out of service area. Drive your vehicle to the service area of the phone. The voice quality of hands-free is low (Distortion, noise etc.) Another wireless device may be located near the unit. Switch off the wireless device or keep it away from the unit. Check the microphone opening for obstruction on audio device. 5-54 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Error display messages The following messages (flashing) will be displayed onto the screen depending on the condition of the audio system. Display Possible solution iPod® USB READ ERROR ERROR 1 iPod® ERROR 1 When the USB device or reading error occurs, this message will be displayed. Reconnect the USB device or iPod® connection cable. When the Bluetooth® audio playback malfunction occurs, this message will be displayed. Check the Bluetooth® audio body. When the USB device or iPod® communication error occurs, this message will be displayed. Reconnect the USB device or iPod® connection cable. ERROR 2 When the USB device or iPod® mechanical error occurs, this message will be displayed. Remove the USB device or iPod®, and check the USB device or the iPod®. ERROR 3 If the USB device or iPod® does not operate due to an over current, this message will be displayed. Remove the USB device or iPod®, and check the USB device or the iPod®. HUB NOT SUPPORTED When the USB hub is connected, this message will be displayed. Disconnect the USB hub. UNSUPPORTED When an unsupported iPod® is connected, this message will be displayed. Connect the supported iPod®. MEDIA NOT SUPPORTED When an unsupported USB device is connected, this message will be displayed. Connect the supported USB device. When the Bluetooth® audio playback malfunction occurs, this message will be displayed. Check the Bluetooth® audio body. NO MUSIC When an empty USB device or iPod® is connected, this message will be displayed. Connect the USB device or iPod® containing files with the playable extension. 5-55 81RM0-74E OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Display Possible solution VEHICLE DATA NOT AVAILABLE Contact your nearest Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop for troubleshooting. MEMORY FULL When the maximum limit for number of phonebook data transfer is reached, this message will be displayed. Delete registered data of unnecessary number in phonebook and try to transfer the register phone numbers in the phonebook again. 5-56 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 81RM06031 Maintenance schedule ........................................................ 6-2 Periodic maintenance schedule ........................................ 6-2 Drive belt .............................................................................. 6-6 Engine oil and filter ............................................................. 6-6 Engine coolant .................................................................... 6-9 Air cleaner ............................................................................ 6-11 Spark plugs .......................................................................... 6-11 Gear oil ................................................................................. 6-12 Clutch ................................................................................... 6-13 Fuel filter .............................................................................. 6-13 6 Brakes .................................................................................. 6-14 Steering ................................................................................ 6-16 Tires ...................................................................................... 6-16 Battery .................................................................................. 6-20 Fuses .................................................................................... 6-21 Headlight aiming ................................................................. 6-26 Bulb replacement ................................................................ 6-26 Wiper blades ........................................................................ 6-32 Windshield washer fluid .....................................................6-35 Air conditioning system .....................................................6-36 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE EXAMPLE 81RM06021 WARNING Take extreme care when working on your vehicle to prevent accidental injury. Carefully observe the following precautions: • To prevent damage or unintended activation of the airbag system or seat belt pretensioner system, check that the battery is disconnected and the ignition switch has been in “LOCK” position for at least 90 seconds before performing any electrical service work on your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle. Do not touch airbag system components, seat belt pretensioner system components or wires. (Continued) WARNING (Continued) The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or yellow tubing, and the couplers are yellow for easy identification. • Do not leave the engine running in garages or other confined areas. • When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing, tools, and other objects away from the fan and drive belt. Even though the fan may not be moving, it can automatically turn on without warning. • When it is necessary to perform service work with the engine running, check that the parking brake is set fully and the transmission is in Neutral (for manual transmission or Auto Gear Shift vehicles). • Do not touch ignition wires or other ignition system parts when starting the engine or when the engine is running, or you could receive an electric shock. • Be careful not to touch a hot engine, exhaust manifold and pipes, muffler, radiator and water hoses. • Do not allow smoking, sparks, or flames around fuel or the battery. Flammable fumes are present. (Continued) WARNING (Continued) • Do not get under your vehicle if it is supported only with the portable jack provided in your vehicle. • Be careful not to cause accidental short circuits between the positive and negative battery terminals. • Keep used oil, coolant, and other fluids away from children and pets. Dispose of used fluids properly; never pour them on the ground, into sewers, etc. 6-1 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Maintenance Schedule The following table shows the times when you should perform regular maintenance on your vehicle. This table shows in kilometers and months when you should perform inspections, adjustments, lubrication and other services. WARNING MARUTI SUZUKI recommends that maintenance on your Maruti Suzuki vehicle should be performed by Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. NOTICE Whenever it becomes necessary to replace parts on your vehicle, it is recommended that you use MARUTI SUZUKI genuine replacement parts or their equivalent. Periodic Maintenance Schedule “C”: Clean “R”: Replace or Change “I”: Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary “L”: Lubricate “T”: Tighten to Specified Torque “O”: Rotate NOTE: This table includes services as scheduled up to 80,000 km mileage. Beyond 80,000 km, carry out the same services at the same intervals respectively. 6-2 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading or months, whichever comes first. FREE INSPECTION km (x 1,000) months PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SERVICE AT COST 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 R ENGINE 1-1. Water pump drive belt (Tension, Wear) – – I I I I I I I 1-2. Engine coolant (Level, Leakage) l l l R l R l R l R 1-3. Engine oil, engine oil filter and drain plug gasket (Level, Leakage) – – R R R R R R R R 1-4. Cooling system hoses and connections (Leakage and Damage) l l l l l l l l l l 1-5. Engine Mounting and manifold fixing (Loose, Damage) – – I – I – I – I – 1-6. Exhaust System (Noise, Leakage etc.) – l – l – I – I – l 1-7. Positive Crankcase Ventilation System (Hoses, Connections and Valve) – l – l – I – I – l – – – l – l – l – l IGNITION 2-1. Ignition wiring (Damage, Deterioration) 2-2. Spark Plug Replace every 100,000 KM or 84 months whichever comes first FUEL 3-1. Air cleaner filter element Paved-road Clean every 5,000 KM. Replace every 40,000 KM. Dusty Condition Clean after every 2,500 KM or as required. Replace every 40,000 KM. More frequent replacement if dust condition is severe. 3-2. Fuel Filter (Leakage) 3-3. Fuel tank cap, fuel lines and connections (Leakage, Damage) I I I I I R I I I R – I – – – I – – – I CLUTCH AND TRANSMISSION 4-1. Clutch Pedal (Play) I I I I I I I I I I 4-2. Clutch slipping (Dragging or Excessive Damage) l l l I l I l I l I 4-3. Manual transmission oil / Auto Gear Shift oil (Level, Leakage) l l l l l l l l l l 4-4. Gear shifter (Operation) I I I I I I I I I I DRIVE SHAFTS 5-1. Drive shaft noise I I I I I I I I I I 5-2. Drive shaft boots (Damage) – I I I I I I I I I 6-3 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading or months, whichever comes first. FREE INSPECTION km (x 1,000) months PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SERVICE AT COST 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 BRAKE 6-1. Brake fluid (Level, Leakage) I I I R I R I R I R 6-2. Brake pedal (Pedal-carpet clearance) I I I I I I I I I I 6-3. Parking brake lever and cable (Play, Damage) I I I I I I I I I I 6-4. Brake discs and pads (Wear) – I I I I I I I I I 6-5. Brake drums and shoes (Wear) – – I I I I I I I I 6-6. Brake hoses and pipes (Fluid leakage, Damage) I I I I I I I I I I 6-7. Master cylinder, wheel cylinder and caliper piston (Fluid leakage, Boot/Seal damage) I I I I I I I I I I WHEEL 7-1. Tires (Air pressure, Abnormal wear, Crack and Rotation) I I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O 7-2. Wheels (Damage) I I I I I I I I I I 7-3. Front/Rear wheel bearing (Loose, Damage) I I I I I I I I I I FRONT / REAR SUSPENSION 8-1. Suspension strut (Oil leakage, Damage) I I I I I I I I I I 8-2. Suspension arms / Knuckle support and Torsion rods (Loose, Damage) – I I I I I I I I I 8-3. Rear spring (Damage) I I I I I I I I I I 8-4. Shock absorbers (Oil leakage, Damage) I I I I I I I I I I 8-5. All bolts and nuts (Loose) – T T T T T T T T T STEERING 9-1. Steering wheel (Play, Loose) I I I I I I I I I I 9-2. All rods and arms (Loose, Damage, Wear) I I I I I I I I I I 9-3. Tilt steering (Operation) I I I I I I I I I I ELECTRICAL 10-1. Battery – electrolyte (Level, Leakage) and Voltage I I I I I I I I I I 10-2. Wiring harness connection (Loose, Damage) – I I I I I I I I I 6-4 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading or months, whichever comes first. FREE INSPECTION km (x 1,000) months PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SERVICE AT COST 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 10-3. Lighting system (Operation, Stains, Damage) I I I I I I I I I I 10-4. Wiper (Operation) I I I I I I I I I I 10-5. Horn (Operation) I I I I I I I I I I 10-6. AUX, USB (if equipped) and accessory socket (Operation) – I I I I I I I I I BODY 11-1. All chassis bolts and nuts (Tighten) – T T T T T T T T T 11-2. All latches, hinges and locks (Function) I I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L ROAD TEST 12-1. Operation of Brakes, gear shifting and speedometer I I I I I I I I I I 12-2. Body and chassis noise I I I I I I I I I I AIR CONDITIONER 13-1. Check belt tension I I I I I I I I I I 13-2. Tighten compressor mounting bolt – T T T T T T T T T I 13-3. All hose joints (Check, Tighten) I I I I I I I I I 13-4. Check functioning of Recirculating flap I I I I I I I I I I 13-5. Clean condenser with low pressure water – C C C C C C C C C 13-6. Check belt for frayed edges I I I I I I I I I I 13-7. Check all mounting bolts I I I I I I I I I I 13-8. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped) I I I I R I I R I I 6-5 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Drive belt Engine oil and filter WARNING When the engine is running, keep hands, hair, clothing, tools, etc. away from the moving fan and drive belts. The drive belts tension is adjusted automatically, If the belt is too loose, insufficient battery charging, engine overheating, poor air conditioning, or excessive belt wear can result. Oil level check EXAMPLE Specified oil EXAMPLE (1) o C -30 o F -22 -20 -10 0W-16 0 10 20 30 40 -4 14 32 68 86 104 50 The belts should also be examined to ensure that they are not damaged If you need to replace or adjust the belt have it done by an Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. 80G064 69RH173 (1) Recommended EXAMPLE Upper Lower Be sure that the engine oil you use comes under the quality classification of API SN. Select the appropriate oil viscosity according to the above chart. SAE 0W-16 (1) is the best choice for good fuel economy, and good starting in cold weather. NOTE: We recommend that you use MARUTI SUZUKI genuine oil. To purchase it, visit an Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. 52D084 6-6 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE It is important to keep the engine oil at the correct level for proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine. Check the oil level with the vehicle on a level surface. The oil level indication may be inaccurate if the vehicle is on a slope. The oil level should be checked either before starting the engine or at least 5 minutes after stopping the engine. The handle of the engine oil dipstick is colored with yellow for easy identification. Pull out the oil dipstick, wipe oil off with a clean cloth, insert the dipstick all the way into the engine, and then remove it again. The oil on the stick should be between the upper and lower limits shown on the stick. If the oil level indication is near the lower limit, add enough oil to raise the level to the upper limit. NOTICE Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil. Refilling Changing engine oil and filter Drain the engine oil while the engine is still warm. EXAMPLE EXAMPLE Open Close Open Close 69RM06007 Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowly through the filler hole to bring the oil level to the upper limit on the dipstick. Be careful not to overfill the oil. Too much oil is almost as bad as too little oil. After refilling, start the engine and allow it to idle for about a minute. Stop the engine, wait about 5 minutes and check the oil level again. 81RM06001 1) Remove the oil filler cap. 2) Place a drain pan under the drain plug. 3) Using a wrench, remove the drain plug and drain the engine oil. CAUTION The engine oil temperature may be high enough to burn your fingers when the drain plug is loosened. Wait until the drain plug is cool enough to touch with your bare hands. 6-7 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE WARNING EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (Continued) To minimize your exposure to used oil, wear a long-sleeve shirt and moisture-proof gloves (such as dishwashing gloves) when changing oil. If oil contacts your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. Launder any clothing or rags if it is with oil. Recycle or properly dispose of used oil and oil filters. 81RM06003 Tightening torque for drain plug: 35 Nm (3.6 kg-m, 25.8 lb-ft) WARNING Engine oil can be hazardous. Children and pets may be harmed by swallowing new or used oil. Keep new and used oil and used oil filters away from children and pets. Repeated, prolonged contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Brief contact with used oil may irritate skin. (Continued) 4) Reinstall the drain plug with new gasket. Tighten the plug with a wrench to the specified torque. Oil filter replacement 1) Using an oil filter wrench, turn the oil filter counterclockwise and remove it. 2) Using a clean rag, wipe off the mounting surface on the engine where the new filter will be seated. 3) Smear a small amount of engine oil around the rubber gasket of the new oil filter. 4) Screw the new filter by hand until the filter gasket contacts the mounting surface. (1) (2) 54G092 (1) Loosen (2) Tighten Tightening (viewed from filter top) EXAMPLE (2) (1) 54G093 (1) Oil filter (2) 3/4 turn 6-8 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE NOTICE To tighten the oil filter properly, it is important to accurately identify the position at which the filter gasket first contacts the mounting surface. 5) Tighten the filter as specified below from the point of contact with the mounting surface (or to the specified torque) using an oil filter wrench. Tightening torque for oil filter 3/4 turn or 14 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 10.3 lb-ft) Refill with oil and oil leakage check 1) Pour oil through the filler hole and install the filler cap. For the approximate capacity of the oil, refer to “Recommended fuel / lubricants and capacities (approx.)” in the “SPECIFICATIONS” section. 2) Start the engine and carefully check the oil filter and the drain plug for leakage. Run the engine at various speeds for at least 5 minutes. 3) Stop the engine and wait about 5 minutes. Check the oil level again and add oil if necessary. Check for leakage again. NOTICE NOTICE To prevent oil leakage, check that the oil filter is tight, but do not overtighten it. • When replacing the oil filter, it is recommended that you use a MARUTI SUZUKI genuine replacement filter. If you use an aftermarket filter, check that it is of equivalent quality and follow the manufacturer’s instructions. • Oil leakage from the periphery of the oil filter or drain plug indicate incorrect installation or gasket damage. If you find any leakage or are not sure that the filter has been properly tightened, have the vehicle inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. Engine coolant Selection of coolant To maintain optimum performance and durability of your engine, use MARUTI SUZUKI genuine coolant or equivalent. This type of coolant is the best for cooling system for the following reasons: • The coolant helps maintain proper engine temperature. • It gives proper protection against freezing and boiling. • It gives proper protection against corrosion and rust. Failure to use the proper coolant can damage your cooling system. Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop can help you select the proper coolant. 6-9 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE NOTICE To avoid damaging your cooling system: • Always use a high quality ethylene glycol base non-silicate type coolant diluted with distilled water at the correct mixture concentration. • Check that the proper mix is 30/70 coolant to distilled water and in no case higher than 70/30. Concentrations greater than 70/30 coolant to distilled water will cause overheating conditions. • Do not use straight coolant nor plain water. • Do not add extra inhibitors or additives. They may not be compatible with your cooling system. • Do not mix different types of base coolants. Doing so may result in accelerated seal wear and/or the possibility of severe overheating and extensive engine damage. Coolant level check Check the coolant level at the reservoir tank, not at the radiator. With the engine cool, the coolant level should be between “FULL” and “LOW” marks. Adding coolant WARNING Swallowing engine coolant can cause severe injury or death. Inhaling coolant mist or vapors or getting coolant in your eyes could result in severe injury. • Do not drink antifreeze or coolant solution. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. Immediately contact a poison control center or a physician. • Avoid inhaling coolant mist or hot vapors. If inhaled, remove to a fresh air area. • If coolant gets in the eyes, flush with water and seek medical attention. • Wash thoroughly after handling coolant. • Keep engine coolant out of the reach of children and pets. NOTICE • The mixture you use should contain 50% concentration of antifreeze. • If the lowest ambient temperature in your area is expected to be –35°C (–31°F) or below, use higher concentrations up to 60% following the instructions on the antifreeze container. EXAMPLE FULL LOW 81RM06002 If the coolant level is below “LOW” mark, more coolant should be added. Remove the reservoir tank cap and add coolant until the reservoir tank level reaches “FULL” mark. Never fill the reservoir tank above “FULL” mark. 6-10 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE NOTICE When putting the cap on the reservoir tank, line up the mark on the cap and the mark on the tank. Failure to follow this can result in coolant leakage. Air cleaner Spark plugs If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there will be greater intake resistance, resulting in decreased power output and increased fuel consumption. Spark plug replacement and inspection EXAMPLE (1) Since special procedures, materials and tools are required, it is recommended that you trust this job to your Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. Coolant replacement Since special procedures are required, ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop for this job. (2) 81RM06004 1) Unhook air cleaner case clamps (1). Open air cleaner case (2) and then remove air cleaner filter. 6-11 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Gear oil Gear oil level check Manual transmission oil / Auto Gear Shift oil To check the gear oil level, use the following procedure: EXAMPLE When adding gear oil, use gear oil with the appropriate viscosity and grade as shown in the chart below. (1) We highly recommend you use “MARUTI GEAR OIL 75W” for manual transmission or Auto Gear Shift oil. Tightening torque for oil filler and level plug Manual transmission oil / Auto Gear Shift oil EXAMPLE 68KH073 (1) Oil filler and level plug 75W o C -30 F -22 o -20 -4 -10 14 0 32 10 50 20 68 1) Park the vehicle on a level surface with the parking brake applied. Then, stop the engine. 2) Remove the oil filler and level plug. 3) If gear oil flows from the plug hole, the oil level is correct. Reinstall the plug. If gear oil does not flow from the plug hole, add oil through the filler plug hole until oil flows a little from the plug hole. 30 86 40 104 54P120706 Manual transmission (1): 21 Nm (2.1 kg-m, 15.5 lb-ft) Auto Gear Shift (1): 21 Nm (2.1 kg-m, 15.5 lb-ft) CAUTION After driving the vehicle, the gear oil temperature may be high enough to burn you. Wait until the oil filler and level plug are cool enough to touch with your bare hands before inspecting gear oil level. 6-12 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE NOTICE When tightening the plug, apply the following sealing compound or equivalent to the plug threads to prevent oil leakage. MARUTI SUZUKI Bond No. “1217G” Clutch Fuel filter Clutch Pedal EXAMPLE Since special procedures are required, we recommend you take your vehicle to a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop for fuel filter replacement. Gear oil change Since special procedures, materials and tools are required, ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop for this job. “d” 54G274 Clutch pedal play “d”: 10 - 15 mm (0.4 - 0.6 in.) Measure the clutch pedal play by moving the clutch pedal with your hand and measuring the distance it moves until you feel slight resistance. The play in the clutch pedal should be between the specified values. If the play is more or less than the above, or clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fully depressed, have the clutch inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. 6-13 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Brakes WARNING Brake fluid EXAMPLE MAX MIN 66RH139 Check the brake fluid level by looking at the reservoir in the engine compartment. Check that the fluid level is between “MAX” and “MIN” lines with Maruti Genuine Brake Fluid (MGBF) or DOT 3. We highly recommend to use “Maruti Genuine Brake Fluid” (MGBF). NOTICE If your brake fluid level is near the “MIN” line, there is a possibility of brake pad and/or shoe wear and brake fluid leakage. Consult with a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop regarding this possibility before filling the reservoir. Failure to follow the guidelines below can result in personal injury or serious damage to the brake system. • If the brake fluid in the reservoir drops below a certain level, the brake warning light on the instrument cluster will come on (the engine must be running with the parking brake fully disengaged). Should the light come on, immediately ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop to inspect the brake system. • A rapid fluid loss indicates leakage in the brake system which should be inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop immediately. • Do not use any fluid other than Maruti Genuine Brake Fluid (MGBF) or DOT 3. Do not use reclaimed fluid or fluid that has been stored in old or open containers. It is essential that foreign particles and other liquids are kept out of the brake fluid reservoir. CAUTION Brake fluid can harm your eyes and damage painted surfaces. Be careful when refilling the reservoir. WARNING Brake fluid is harmful or fatal if swallowed, and harmful if it comes in contact with skin or eyes. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. Immediately contact a poison control center or a physician. If brake fluid gets in eyes, flush eyes with water and seek medical attention. Wash thoroughly after handling. Solution can be poisonous to animals. Keep out of reach of children and animals. NOTE: • The fluid level can be expected to gradually fall as the brake pad and/or shoe wear. • Brake fluid absorbs water over time and brake fluid with high water content may cause vapor lock or brake system malfunction. Replace your brake fluid in accordance with the maintenance schedule in your Owner’s Manual. Brake pedal Check if the brake pedal stops at the regular height without “spongy” feeling when you depress it. If not, have the brake system inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. If you doubt the brake pedal is at its normal height, check it as follows: 6-14 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE EXAMPLE NOTE: When measuring the distance between the brake pedal and floor wall, be sure not to include the floor mat or rubber on the floor wall in your measurement. Parking brake EXAMPLE (1) EXAMPLE “a” ‘’b’’ 81RM06024 Minimum distance between brake pedal and floor carpet “a”: M/T model: 86 mm (3.4 in.) AGS model: 83 mm (3.3 in.) With the engine running, measure the distance between the brake pedal and floor carpet when the pedal is depressed with approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) of force. The minimum distance required is as specified. Since your vehicle’s brake system is selfadjusting, there is no need for pedal adjustment. If the pedal to floor carpet distance as measured above is less than the minimum distance required, have your vehicle inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. 54G109 81RM06005 WARNING If you experience any of the following problems with your vehicle’s brake system, have the vehicle inspected immediately by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. • Poor braking performance • Uneven braking (brakes not working uniformly on all wheels.) • Excessive pedal travel • Brake dragging • Excessive noise Ratchet tooth specification “b”: 4th – 9th Lever pull force (1): 200 N (20 kg, 45 lbs) Check the parking brake for proper adjustment by counting the number of clicks made by the ratchet teeth as you slowly pull up on the parking brake lever to the point of full engagement. The parking brake lever should stop between the specified ratchet teeth and the rear wheels should be securely locked. If the parking brake is not properly adjusted or the brakes drag after the lever has been fully released, have the parking brake inspected and/or adjusted by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. 6-15 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Steering Tires Tire inspection Inspect your vehicle’s tires at least once a month by performing the following checks: EXAMPLE 1) Measure the air pressure with a tire gauge. Adjust the pressure if necessary. Remember to check the spare tire, too. WARNING “c” EXAMPLE 69RH174 Steering wheel play “c”: 0 – 30 mm (0.0 – 1.2 in.) Check the play of the steering wheel by gently turning it from left to right and right to left, with wheels in straight ahead position and engine in OFF condition. Measure the distance that the steering moves before you feel slight resistance. The play should be between the specified values. Check that the steering wheel turns easily and smoothly without rattling by turning it all the way to the right and to the left while driving very slowly in an open area. If the amount of free play is not as specified or you find anything else to be wrong, an inspection must be performed by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. 55RM07004 The front and rear tire pressure specifications are listed on the tire information label. Both front and rear tires should have the specified tire pressure. • Air pressures should be checked when the tires are cold or you may get inaccurate readings. • Check the inflation pressure from time to time while inflating the tire gradually, until the specified pressure is obtained. • Never under-inflate or over-inflate the tires. Under-inflation can cause unusual handling characteristics or can cause the rim to slip on the tire bead, resulting in an accident or damage to the tire or rim. Over-inflation can cause the tire to burst, resulting in personal injury. Over-inflation can also cause unusual handling characteristics which may result in an accident. 6-16 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE EXAMPLE CAUTION Hitting curbs and running over rocks can damage tires and affect wheel alignment. Have tires and wheel alignment checked periodically by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. (1) 4) Check for loose wheel nuts. 5) Check that there are no nails, stones or other objects sticking into the tires. (2) 81RM06006 (1) Tread wear indicator (2) Indicator location mark 2) Check that the depth of the tread groove is more than 1.6 mm (0.06 in.). To help you check this, the tires have molded-in tread wear indicators in the grooves. When the indicators appear on the tread surface, the remaining depth of the tread is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less and the tire should be replaced. 3) Check for abnormal wear, cracks and damage. Any tires with cracks or other damage should be replaced. If any tires show abnormal wear, have them inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. WARNING • Your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle is equipped with tires which are all the same type and size (Except spare tire, which may be dependent on vehicle variant). This is important to ensure proper steering and handling of the vehicle. Never mix tires of different size or type on the four wheels of your vehicle. The size and type of tires used should be only those approved by MARUTI SUZUKI as standard or optional equipment for your vehicle. • Replacing the wheels and tires equipped on your vehicle with certain combinations of aftermarket wheels and tires can significantly change the steering and handling characteristics of your vehicle. • Therefore, use only those wheel and tire combinations approved by MARUTI SUZUKI as standard or optional equipment for your vehicle. 6-17 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE NOTICE Replacing the original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer or odometer readings. Check with a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop before purchasing replacement tires that differ in size from the original tires. Tire rotation To avoid uneven wear of your tires and to prolong their life, rotate the tires as illustrated. Tires should be rotated as mentioned in periodic maintenance schedule. After rotation, adjust front and rear tire pressures to the specification listed on your vehicle’s tire information label. 4-tire rotation EXAMPLE Wheel Balancing If the vehicle vibrates abnormally on smooth road, have the wheel balanced at Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. 54G114 5-tire rotation Wheel Alignment In case of abnormal tire wear or pulling towards one side, have the wheel aligned at Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. Tubeless Tires The vehicle is equipped with Tubeless Tires. In tubeless tire, a thin layer of butyl rubber is used for lining the inside of the tubeless tire. This layer is to prevent air loss and fulfilling the purpose of tube. The air pressure is maintained by the sealing between tire bead and wheel rim. Tubeless tires are having advantage of slow air loss and preventing sudden deflation while driving. EXAMPLE 68PH00755 6-18 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Care and maintenance tips for tubeless tires 1) Always maintain recommended inflation pressure. Driving continuously at low inflation pressure can lead to tire damage. 2) In case any leakage is found, check for any nail penetration/valve core damage or rim bent. Damaged wheel must not be used. 3) In case tire has run at low pressure, it must be inspected for any defect. 4) Whenever new tire is fitted, replace the valve. 5) If continuous high speed driving is required, increase tires pressure by 5 psi over recommended inflation pressure. 6) Never run the tire beyond TWI (Tread wear indicator). The tire is recommended to be replaced when the remaining tread has worn to this point. The indicators are spaced across the tread around the tire marked by a triangular symbol (TWI). 7) Always prefer tubeless tire mounting machine. In case of manual mountingtire/ wheel rim damage may occur. 8) In case of any problem, please get in touch with Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. Temporary spare tire (if equipped) Your vehicle comes equipped with the temporary spare tire. It is only intended for temporary emergency use, until the conventional tire can be repaired or replaced. The inflation pressure of the temporary spare tire should be checked at least monthly. At the same time, check that the tire is stored securely. If it is not, tighten it. Note that two or more temporary spare tires should not be used on one vehicle simultaneously. WARNING The temporary spare tire and wheel are intended for temporary emergency use only. Continuous use of this spare can result in tire failure and loss of control. Always observe these precautions when using this spare: • Your vehicle will handle differently with this temporary spare. • Do not exceed 120 km/h speed (only vehicle with 175/60R15 81H tire). • Replace this spare with a standard tire and wheel as soon as possible. • Use of this spare may reduce ground clearance. • Set the specified tire pressure indicated on the tire information label located on the driver’s door lock pillar. • Do not use tire chains on the temporary spare. If you must use tire chains, rearrange the wheels so standard tires and wheels are fitted to the front axle. • The temporary spare tire has a much shorter tread life than the conventional tires on your vehicle. Replace the tire as soon as the tread wear indicator appears. • When replacing the temporary spare tire, use a replacement tire with the exact same size and construction. 6-19 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Battery WARNING WARNING • Batteries produce flammable hydrogen gas. Keep flames and sparks away from the battery or an explosion may occur. Never smoke when working near the battery. • When checking or servicing the battery, disconnect the negative cable. Be careful not to cause a short circuit by allowing metal objects to contact the battery posts and the vehicle at the same time. • To avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery, follow the jump-starting instructions in the “EMERGENCY SERVICE” section if it is necessary to jumpstart your vehicle. • Diluted sulfuric acid spilled from battery can cause blindness or severe burns. Use proper eye protection and gloves. Flush eyes or body with ample water and get medical care immediately if suffered. Keep batteries out of reach of children. • Your vehicle is equipped with the ENG A-STOP system and the battery which is exclusive for the ENG A-STOP system is used.Only use the specified type of battery for ENG A-STOP system.Refer to (Continued) (Continued) “SPECIFICATION” section for details.Otherwise, you could damage your vehicle, and the ENG A-STOP system could not be available.If a vehicle battery has to be replaced, consult an Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. EXAMPLE (1) (2) 56RM07007 For maintenance-free battery (cap-less type), you need not add water. For traditional type battery, which has water filler caps, the level of the battery fluid (acid) must be kept between the upper level line (1) and lower level line (2) at all times. You should periodically check the battery, battery terminals, and battery hold-down bracket for corrosion. Remove corrosion using a stiff brush and ammonia mixed with water, or baking soda mixed with water. After removing corrosion, rinse with clean water. If your vehicle is not going to be driven for a month or longer, disconnect the cable from the negative terminal of the battery to help prevent discharge. WARNING If the battery is used with battery level being less than the lower level line (2), it may cause reduced battery life, an exothermic heat, or an explosion by hydrogen gas occurring from the battery. Do not use the battery with battery level being less than the lower level line (2). NOTICE If the battery liquid is added more than the upper level line (1), liquid may leak by vibrations during driving or liquid may spray out in some case depending on the condition of battery charging. These may cause damage to the parts near the battery. If the battery liquid overspills, immediately wash away with water. Do not add the battery liquid more than the upper level line (1). 6-20 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE NOTE: The battery liquid is consumed when the battery is used. If the level is found to be less than the center of upper level (1) and lower level (2), add distilled water till it reaches the upper level line (1). NOTE: • When the battery is disconnected, some of the vehicle’s function will be initialized and/or deactivated. • These function are required to reset after the battery is reconnected. Replacement of the battery • Do not disconnect the battery terminals for at least one minute after the ignition switch is turned off, or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF). (3) (1) (2) WARNING (4) EXAMPLE (5) (6) 56RM07019 To remove the battery: 1) Disconnect the negative cable (1). 2) Disconnect the positive cable (2). 3) Remove the retainer nuts (3) and remove the retainer (4). 4) Remove the battery. Batteries contain toxic substances including sulfuric acid and lead. They could have potential negative consequences for the environment and human health. Used battery must be disposed or recycled according to the local law and must not be discarded with ordinary household waste. Make sure not to tip over the battery when you remove it from the vehicle. Otherwise, sulfuric acid could run out and you might get injury. Fuses Your vehicle has three types of fuses, as described below: Main fuse The main fuse takes current directly from the battery. Primary fuses These fuses are between the main fuse and individual fuses, and are for electrical load groups. Individual fuses These fuses are for individual electrical circuits. NOTE: • “Blank” indicates that fuse is not applicable in the variant, even though name of fuse might be available on cover of fuse box of your vehicle. • Some fuse may not be applicable to your vehicle according to the variant of vehicle, even though it is not mentioned as blank. To install the battery: 1) Install the battery in the reverse order of removal. 2) Tighten the bracket bolt and battery cables securely. 6-21 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller provided in the fuse box. Fuses in engine compartment EXAMPLE (5) (4) (1) (3) (2) 52RS70020 (39) (38) (37) 81RM06007 (15) (6) (7) (40) (43) (41) (42) (16) (23) (17) (24) (9) (10) (25) (18) (11) (26) (19) (12) (27) (20) (28) (21) (13) (29) (22) (14) (30) (36) (8) (31) (35) (34) (33) (32) FRONT 81RM06008 MAIN FUSE / PRIMARY FUSE (1) 120 A FL1 (2) 100 A FL2 (3) 80 A FL3 (4) 100 A FL4 (5) 50 A FL5 (6) 40 A Power steering (7) – Blank (8) 10 A A/C compressor (9) 15 A FI (10) 15 A Headlight (Left) (11) 15 A Headlight (Right) (12) 30 A Starter motor (13) 30 A Radiator fan (14) – (15) 40 A Blank Ignition switch 2 (16) – (17) 30 A T/M PUMP Blank (18) 30 A Back-up (19) – Blank (20) 15 A Front fog light (21) 30 A DCDC 6-22 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE (22) 30 A Blower fan (23) – (24) 5A (25) – Blank (26) – Blank (27) – Blank (28) – Blank (29) – Blank (30) – Blank (31) 40 A ABS motor (32) 25 A ABS solenoid Blank Starting signal (33) – (34) 10 A T/M Blank (35) 5A T/M2 (36) 40 A Ignition switch (37) 5A Spare fuse (38) 10 A Spare fuse (39) 15 A Spare fuse (40) 20 A Spare fuse (41) 25 A Spare fuse (42) 30 A Spare fuse (43) 7.5 A Spare fuse The main fuse, primary fuses and some of the individual fuses are located in the engine compartment. If the main fuse blows, no electrical component will function. If a primary fuse blows, no electrical component in the corresponding load group will function. When replacing the main fuse, a primary fuse or an individual fuse, use a MARUTI SUZUKI genuine replacement. To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller provided in the fuse box. The amperage of each fuse is shown in the back of the fuse box cover. WARNING If the main fuse or a primary fuse blows, have your vehicle inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. Always use a MARUTI SUZUKI genuine replacement. Never use a substitute such as a wire even for a temporary repair, or extensive electrical damage and a fire can result. NOTE: Check that the fuse box always carries spare fuses. EXAMPLE OK BLOWN 60G111 6-23 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Fuses under dashboard PRIMARY FUSE EXAMPLE (1) 30 A Power window (2) 10 A Meter (3) 15 A Ignition coil (4) 5A Ignition-1 signal 2 (5) 20 A Shift lever* (6) 20 A S/R* (7) – (8) 20 A Door lock (9) 15 A Steering lock (10) 10 A Hazard (11) 5A A-STOP controller (12) 10 A RR fog lamp* (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) 5A ABS control module (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (14) 15 A S/H* 81RM06022 Type A (1) (26) (27) (28) (29) (30) (31) (32) (33) (34) (35) (36) (37) (38) 69RH120 Blank (15) 5A Ignition-1 signal 3* (16) 10 A Dome light-2 (17) 5A Dome light (18) 15 A Radio (19) 15 A Controller (20) 5A Key 2 (21) 20 A P/W T* (22) 5A Key (23) 15 A Horn (24) 5A Tail light (Left)* (25) 10 A Tail light (26) 10 A Airbag (27) 10 A Ignition-1 signal (28) 10 A Back-up light (29) 5A ACC-3 (30) 20 A Rear defogger (31) 10 A Heated mirror (32) 15 A ACC-2 (33) 5A ACC (34) 10 A Wiper (35) 5A Ignition-2 signal (36) 15 A Washer (37) 25 A Front wiper (38) 10 A Stop light * Feature not available in the vehicle 6-24 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Type B (1) (2) (3) (10) (4) (11) (5) (12) (6) (13) (7) (14) (8) (15) (9) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29) (30) 81RM06009 PRIMARY FUSE (1) - Spare (2) - Spare (3) 25A (4) - Spare (5) - Spare (6) - Spare (7) 5A Dome light (8) 15 A Radio (9) 5A (10) - (11) 5A Rear Defogger ST SIG (starting signal) (12) 15 A HORN (13) 20 A Door Lock (14) 5A ACC (15) 15 A ACC-2 (16) 5A ACC-3 (17) 10 A Back-up light (18) 10 A Airbag (19) 10 A Ignition-1 signal (20) 10 A Meter (21) 5A ABS control module (22) 15 A Ignition coil (23) 10 A DOME-2 (dome light-2) (24) 10 A Tail light (25) 10 A Hazard (26) 10 A STOP (stop light) (27) 25 A Front wiper (28) 5A Ignition-2 signal (29) 15 A Washer (30) 30 A Power window EXAMPLE OK BLOWN 81A283 WARNING Always replace a blown fuse with a fuse of the correct amperage. Never use a substitute such as aluminum foil or wire to replace a blown fuse. If you replace a fuse and the new one blows in a short period of time, you may have a major electrical problem. Have your vehicle inspected immediately by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. Blank Controller 6-25 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Headlight aiming Since special procedures are required, ask a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop for this job. Bulb replacement CAUTION • Light bulbs can be hot enough to burn your finger right after turning off lights. This is true especially for halogen headlight bulbs. Replace the bulbs after they become cool enough. • The headlight bulbs are filled with pressurized halogen gas. They can burst and injure you if they are hit or dropped. Handle them carefully. • To avoid injury by sharp-edged parts of the body, wear gloves and a long-sleeved shirt when replacing light bulbs. NOTE: Mist may form on the lenses of exterior lights (Headlight, Rear combination light etc.) during or after driving in the rain or after car washing. This is a natural phenomenon which occurs due to temperature difference between lamp inside and outside. Temporary mist on the lens is not a malfunction and will not cause any discomfort during vehicle driving. The mist would get cleared when the environmental condition change to sunny or when headlamp is kept on. However if there is water leakage inside the lamp, contact your Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. NOTICE • The oils from your skin may cause a halogen bulb to overheat and burst when the lights are on. Grasp a new bulb with a clean cloth. • Frequent bulb replacement indicates the need for an inspection of the electrical system. This should be carried out by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. • During bulb replacement always use same bulb number as used in vehicle which is imprinted on the said bulb/unit and/or mentioned in SPECIFICATIONS. 6-26 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Headlights EXAMPLE 2) Push the retaining spring (4) forward and unhook it. Then remove the bulb. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal. Front fog light (if equipped) (3) (1) 1) Start the engine. Turn the steering wheel to the opposite side of the fog light to be replaced to replace the bulb easily. Then turn off the engine. (2) EXAMPLE 80JM071 81RM06010 3) Open the end of the cover inside the fender. Disconnect the coupler by pushing the lock release. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 1) Open the engine hood while the engine is stopped. Disconnect the coupler (1). Remove the sealing rubber (2) by pulling the grip (3). (1) EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 81RM06023 2) Remove the clip (1) by prying it off with a flat-bladed screwdriver as shown in the illustration. (4) 81RM06026 6-27 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Side turn signal light Outside rearview mirror type LED module is used. It is recommended that you take your vehicle to a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop for LED module replacement. 3) To remove and install the bulb of the turn signal light (3), simply pull out or push in the bulb. EXAMPLE (2) Front turn signal light and front position light EXAMPLE Fender type EXAMPLE (1) 76MH0A007 2) Turn the bulb holder (2) clockwise and pull it out from the light housing. (2) EXAMPLE (1) 81RM06012 (1) Front turn signal light (2) Front position light 76MH0A006 1) Remove the side turn signal light assembly by sliding light housing (1) to left with your finger. (3) (4) (5) 76MH0A008 (4) Removal (5) Install 6-28 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE EXAMPLE Rear combination light EXAMPLE (3) (2) (1) (2) (3) (3) (4) EXAMPLE 68PH00732 1) Open the engine hood while the engine is stopped. To remove the bulb holder of the front turn signal light (1) or the front position light (2) from the light housing, turn the holder counterclockwise and pull it out. (3) (1) 61MM0B078 (3) Removal (4) Install 2) To remove the bulb of the front turn signal light (1) from the bulb holder, push in the bulb and turn it counterclockwise. To install a new bulb, push it in and turn it clockwise. To remove and install the bulb of the front position light (2), simply pull out or push in the bulb. 81RM06013 1) Remove the bolts (1) and pull the light housing (2) straight. NOTE: When reinstalling the light housing, check that the clips (3) are properly attached. 6-29 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE EXAMPLE (4) License plate light EXAMPLE (7) EXAMPLE (4) / (5) / (6) (8) (5) (1) 69RH163 (7) Removal (8) Install (6) 81RM06014 2) To remove the bulb holder of the tail/ brake light (4), the turn signal light (5) or the reversing light (6) from the light housing, turn the holder counterclockwise and pull it out. 3) To remove the bulb of the tail/brake light (4), the turn signal light (5) or the reversing light (6) from bulb holder, push in the the bulb and turn it counterclockwise. To install a new bulb, push it in and turn it clockwise. 69RH105 1) Turn the covers (1) counterclockwise to remove it. EXAMPLE (2) 69RH106 2) To remove and install the bulb of the license plate light (2), simply pull out or push in the bulb. 6-30 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE High-mount stop light Interior light EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (2) (3) (4) (1) 69RH107 1) Open the tailgate, and pull the cover (1) straight as shown in the illustration. 69RH086 (3) Removal (4) Install 3) To remove and install the bulb of the high-mount stop light (2), simply pull out or push in the bulb. 69RM06009 1) Remove the lens by using a flat blade screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as shown. EXAMPLE 69RH134 2) Remove the bulb holder as shown in the illustration. 6-31 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE EXAMPLE Wiper blades NOTE: Some wiper blades may be different from the ones described here depending on vehicle specifications. If so, consult a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop for proper replacement method. For windshield wipers: EXAMPLE (3) (4) 69RM06009 (3) Removal (4) Installation 2) Pull the bulb out and then insert a new one. 3) After replacing the bulb, install the rear interior light lens in the reverse order of removal. EXAMPLE 81RM06016 If the wiper blades become brittle or damaged, or make streaks when wiping, replace the wiper blades. To install new wiper blade rubber, follow the procedures below. NOTICE To avoid scratching or breaking the window, do not let the wiper arm strike the window while replacing the wiper blade. 81RM06017 1) Hold the wiper arm away from the window. NOTE: When raising both of the front wiper arms, pull the driver’s side wiper arm up first. When returning the wiper arms, lower the passenger’s side wiper arm first. Otherwise, the wiper arms may interfere with each other. 6-32 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Removal EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (4) EXAMPLE (2) (1) (4) 60A260 Installation EXAMPLE (2) 66RH108 (4) Retainer 4) If the new blade is provided without the two metal retainers (4), move them from the old blade to the new one. (3) EXAMPLE (1) (3) (4) 54G130 2) Squeeze lock (1) towards wiper arm (2) and remove the wiper frame from the arm as shown. 3) Unlock the lock end of the wiper blade and slide the blade out as shown. 66RH107 (3) Locked end (4) 66RH109 6-33 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE For rear wipers: EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (A) (B) (4) 66RH110 (A) Up (B) Down NOTE: When you install the metal retainers (4), check that the direction of metal retainers is as shown in the above illustrations. 5) Install the new blade in the reverse order of removal, with the locked end positioned toward the wiper arm. Check that the blade is properly retained by all the hooks. Lock the blade end into place. 6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm, checking that the lock lever is snapped securely into the arm. 81RM06018 1) Hold the wiper arm away from the window. 2) Remove the wiper frame from the arm as shown. 81RM06032 6-34 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3) Slide the blade out as shown. Windshield washer fluid EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (1) (1) EXAMPLE 69RH182 65D15 NOTE: Do not flex the wiper blade frame end more than necessary. If you do, it can break off. (1) Retainer 4) If the new blade is provided without the two metal retainers, move them from the old blade to the new one. 5) Install the new blade in the reverse order of removal. Check that the blade is properly retained by all the hooks. 6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm in the reverse order of removal. 81RM06019 Check that there is washer fluid in the tank. Refill it if necessary. Use a good quality windshield washer fluid, diluted with water as necessary. WARNING Do not use radiator antifreeze in the windshield washer reservoir. It can severely impair visibility when sprayed on the windshield, and can also damage your vehicle’s paint. NOTICE Damage may result if the washer motor is operated with no fluid in the washer tank. 6-35 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Air Conditioning System If you do not use the air conditioner for a long period, such as during winter, it may not give the best performance when you start using it again. To help maintain optimum performance and durability of your air conditioner, it needs to be run periodically. Operate the air conditioner at least once a month for one minute with the engine idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil and helps protect the internal components. 3) Slide the tab of the holder (1) in an arrow direction and remove the holder. (1) (1) (1) (1) Air Conditioner Filter Replacement Since special procedures are required, ask a Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for this job. EXAMPLE 81RM06027 EXAMPLE 2) Unlock the holder (1) and release it from the air conditioner unit. EXAMPLE 81RM06029 NOTICE (1) Do not apply excessive force to the tab when removing the holder (1). Otherwise, the tab may be damaged. (1) 81RM06020 1) To approach the air conditioner filter, remove the glove box.Press both sides of the glove box in arrow direction to remove it. EXAMPLE 81RM06028 6-36 81RM0-74E INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE (2) (3) EXAMPLE 81RM06030 4) Pull out the air conditioner filter (2). NOTE: When you install a new air conditioner filter, check that the UP mark (3) faces upward 6-37 81RM0-74E EMERGENCY SERVICE EMERGENCY SERVICE Tire changing tool ............................................................... 7-1 Jacking instructions ........................................................... 7-3 Jump-starting instructions ................................................. 7-7 Towing your vehicle ............................................................ 7-9 Engine trouble: Starter does not operate ......................... 7-10 Engine trouble: Flooded engine ........................................ 7-10 Engine trouble: Overheating .............................................. 7-10 Warning triangle .................................................................. 7-11 7 60G411A 81RM0-74E EMERGENCY SERVICE Tire changing tool (3) EXAMPLE (4) (1) (2) EXAMPLE 69RM07006 (3) The jack (4) is stowed under the driver’s seat. Slide the driver’s seat backward. To remove the jack (4), turn the jack shaft (at the right side of the seat) counterclockwise by hand and pull the jack out of the storage bracket from the front side of the seat. NOTE: If it is difficult to turn the shaft by hand, use jack handle (3) as shown in the illustration. 81RM07005 (1) Towing hook (2) Wheel brace (3) Jack handle To stow the jack, place it in the storage bracket and turn the shaft clockwise with hand. 7-1 81RM0-74E EMERGENCY SERVICE (3) EXAMPLE EXAMPLE NOTICE To avoid damaging the storage bracket, do not expand the jack excessively. EXAMPLE (4) (5) 69RM07003 81RM070003 After temporarily holding the jack (4) until it contacts the storage bracket, turn the shaft approximately 90° to 180° by using jack handle (3) to securely hold the jack in place. To remove the spare tire, turn its bolt (5) counterclockwise and remove it. 81RM070002 WARNING After using the tire changing tools, stow them securely or they can cause injury if an accident occurs. CAUTION The jack should be used only to change wheels. It is important to read the jacking instructions in this section before attempting to use the jack. To remove the luggage compartment carpet, lift the carpet by using the hole provided on the carpet and fold the both side of the carpet, and pull it out. NOTE: When installing, install the carpet in the reverse order of removal. Store the spare tire in the reverse order of removal. Attach the center of the wheel to the attachment nut, and tighten firmly with the bolt. After storing, verify that the spare tire is stored securely. Make sure that there is no looseness by trying to shake the spare tire. NOTICE If there is a looseness, it may cause a rattling and damage the paintwork. 7-2 81RM0-74E EMERGENCY SERVICE Jacking instructions EXAMPLE 5) Place the spare wheel near the wheel being lifted as shown in the illustration in case the jack slips. EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 75F062 1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground. 2) Set the parking brake firmly and shift into “R” (Reverse) if your vehicle has a manual transmission/Auto Gear Shift. WARNING 54G253 75RM077 EXAMPLE • Shift into “R” (Reverse) for a manual transmission/Auto Gear Shift vehicle when you jack up the vehicle. • Never jack up the vehicle with the transmission in “N” (Neutral). Otherwise, unstable jack may cause an accident. 3) Turn on the hazard warning flasher if your vehicle is near traffic. 4) Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the wheel being lifted. 68PM00802 7-3 81RM0-74E EMERGENCY SERVICE 6) Position the jack at an angle as shown in the illustration and raise the jack by turning the jack handle clockwise until the jack-head groove fits around the jacking bar beneath the vehicle body. 7) Continue to raise the jack slowly and smoothly until the tire clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle more than necessary. WARNING If the jack comes off, your body may be caught in the vehicle and it may result in a serious injury. Also, the vehicle may start to move and it may result in an accident. When jacking up the vehicle, observe the following points. • Jack up the vehicle on hard and level ground. • Use the jack only for replacing the tyres or repair the flat tyres. • Use this vehicle's jack only and do not use the other vehicle's jack. Also, do not use this vehicle's jack for the other vehicle. • Place the jack on the designated position. If you place the jack on the position other than the designated one, the jack may come off and the vehicle may get damaged. • Do not lift up the vehicle more than necessary by the jack. • When lifting up the vehicle by the jack, do not get into under the vehicle, do not start the engine and do not shake the vehicle. • When lifting up the vehicle, do not pinch any object on or under the jack. • Do not lift up several tyres at the same time, using several jacks. (Continued) WARNING (Continued) • Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. • Never get under the vehicle when it is supported by the jack. Never place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle when it is supported by a jack. 7-4 81RM0-74E EMERGENCY SERVICE Raising vehicle with garage jack • Apply the garage jack to one of the points indicated below. • Always support the raised vehicle with jack stands (commercially available) at the points indicated below. (1) (4) (2) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Front Jack stand Garage jack Rear Jacking point for garage jack WARNING As the vehicle may get damaged or an accident may occur, observe the following points. • Observe the designated points shown in the illustrations. • When holding the lifted vehicle, use the rigid rack. • When jacking up the front side or the rear side only, place a chock (commercially-available product) on front and back of the grounded tyre. (2) (1) NOTICE (1) (5) (4) Never apply a garage jack to the exhaust pipe, side under spoiler (if equipped) or rear torsion beam. (5) NOTE: For more details, contact a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. (3) (3) EXAMPLE 81RM070004 7-5 81RM0-74E EMERGENCY SERVICE 4) Remove the wheel nuts and wheel. Changing wheels WARNING Never change a wheel in traffic lane. Always move the vehicle off the road on level, hard ground away from traffic for changing a wheel. For any further assistance contact your nearest Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. To change a wheel, use the following procedure: 1) Remove the jack, tools and spare wheel from the vehicle. 2) Loosen, but do not remove the wheel nuts. 3) Jack up the vehicle (follow the jacking instructions in this section). WARNING • Shift into “R” (Reverse) for a manual transmission/Auto Gear Shift vehicle when you jack up the vehicle. • Never jack up the vehicle with the transmission in “N” (Neutral). Otherwise, unstable jack may cause an accident. CAUTION EXAMPLE Immediately after the vehicle has been driven, the wheels, the wheel nuts and the area around the brakes might be extremely hot. Touching these areas may cause burn injury. Do not touch these areas, immediately after the vehicle has been driven. (1) (2) (3) (4) 69RH177 5) Clean any mud or dirt off from the surface of the wheel (1), hub (2), thread part (3) and surface of the wheel nuts (4) with a clean cloth. Clean the hub carefully; it may be hot from driving. 6) Install the new wheel and replace the wheel nuts with their cone shaped end facing the wheel. Tighten each nut snugly by hand until the wheel is securely seated on the hub. 7-6 81RM0-74E EMERGENCY SERVICE EXAMPLE Full wheel cover (if equipped) EXAMPLE WARNING (1) (2) 69RM07001 55RM08006 Tightening torque for wheel nut 100 Nm (10.1 kg-m, 73.7 lb-ft) 7) Lower the jack and fully tighten the nuts with a wrench in numerical order as shown in the illustration. Remove the full wheel cover by using jack handle (1) covered with a soft cloth (2), as shown in the illustration. EXAMPLE WARNING Use genuine wheel nuts and tighten them to the specified torque as soon as possible after changing wheels. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts may come loose or fall off, which can result in an accident. If you do not have a torque wrench, have the wheel nut torque checked by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. Jump-starting instructions 54P000803 Ensure not to cover or foul the air valve while installing the full wheel cover. • Never attempt to jump-start your vehicle if the battery appears to be frozen. Batteries in this condition may explode. • When making jump lead connections, check that your hands and the jump leads remain clear from pulleys, belts or fans. • Batteries produce flammable hydrogen gas. Keep flames and sparks away from the battery or an explosion may occur. Never smoke when working near the battery. • If the booster battery you use for jump-starting is installed in another vehicle, check that the two vehicles are not touching each other. • If your battery discharges repeatedly, for no apparent reason, have your vehicle inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. • To avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery, follow the jump-starting instructions below. If you are in doubt, call for qualified road service. 7-7 81RM0-74E EMERGENCY SERVICE NOTICE WARNING Your vehicle should not be started by pushing or towing. This starting method could result in permanent damage to the catalytic converter. Use jump leads to start a vehicle with a weak or discharged battery. 1) Use only a 12-volt battery to jump-start your vehicle. Position the good 12-volt battery close to your vehicle so that the jump leads will reach both batteries. When using a battery installed on another vehicle, check that two vehicles do not touch each other. Set the parking brakes fully on both vehicles. 2) Turn off all vehicle accessories, except those necessary for safety reasons (for example, headlights or hazard lights). Never connect the jump lead directly to the negative (–) terminal of the discharged battery, or an explosion may occur. (1) CAUTION (3) EXAMPLE (2) 54P000804 3) Connect jump leads as follows: 1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery (1). 2. Connect the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery (2). 3. Connect one end of the second jump lead to the negative (–) terminal of the booster battery (2). 4. Make the final connection to an unpainted, heavy metal part (i.e. engine mount bracket (3)) of the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery (1). Connect the jump lead to the engine mount bracket securely. If the jump lead disconnects from the engine mount bracket because of vibration at the start of the engine, the jump lead could be caught in the drive belts. 4) If the booster battery you are using is fitted to another vehicle, start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery. Run the engine at moderate speed. 5) Start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 6) Remove the jump leads in the exact reverse order in which you connected them. 7-8 81RM0-74E EMERGENCY SERVICE Towing your vehicle If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional service. Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop can provide you with detailed towing instructions. NOTICE Observe the following instructions when towing your vehicle. • To help avoid damage to your vehicle during towing, proper equipment and towing procedures must be used. • Using the frame hook, tow your vehicle on paved roads for short distances at low speed. 2-wheel drive (2WD) manual transmission or Auto Gear Shift Manual transmission vehicles or Auto Gear Shift vehicles may be towed using either of the following methods. 1) From the front, with the front wheels lifted and the rear wheels on the ground. Before towing, check that the parking brake is released. 2) From the rear, with the rear wheels lifted and the front wheels on the ground, provided the steering and drivetrain are in operational condition. Before towing, check that transmission is in neutral, the steering wheel is unlocked (vehicle without keyless push start system - the ignition key should be in “ACC” position) (vehicle with keyless push start system - the ignition mode is “ACC”), and the steering wheel is secured with a clamping device designed for towing service. NOTICE • The steering column is not strong enough to withstand shocks transmitted from the front wheels during towing. Always unlock the steering wheel before towing. • After shifting the Auto Gear Shift gearshift lever to the “N” position, always check the gear position indicator in the instrument cluster shows the “N” position to make sure that the transmission is disengaged. If the transmission cannot be put in neutral, turn the key from “LOCK” to “ON” position or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “ON”, and move the Auto Gear Shift gearshift lever from “N” to “D”, “M” or “R”, then back to “N” again. Then turn the key from “ON” to “LOCK” position or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF).These procedures may help put the transmission in neutral. If the transmission still cannot be put in neutral, you cannot tow the vehicle without using a towing dolly. 7-9 81RM0-74E EMERGENCY SERVICE Engine trouble: Starter does not operate Engine trouble: Flooded engine 1) Try turning the ignition switch to “START” position or try pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “START” with the headlights turned on to determine the battery condition. If the headlights go excessively dim or go off, it usually means that either the battery is discharged or the battery terminal contact is poor. Recharge the battery or correct battery terminal contact as necessary. 2) If the headlights remain bright, check the fuses. If the reason for failure of the starter is not obvious, there may be a major electrical problem. Have the vehicle inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. If the engine is flooded with petrol, it may be hard to start. If this happens, press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine. Do not operate the starter motor for more than 12 seconds. NOTE: For keyless push start system, if the engine refuses to start, the starter motor automatically stops after a certain period of time. After the starter motor has automatically stopped or if there is anything abnormal in the engine starting system, the starter motor runs only while the engine switch is held pressed. Engine trouble: Overheating The engine could overheat temporarily under severe driving conditions. If the high engine coolant temperature warning light comes on as overheating during driving: 1) Turn off the air conditioner, if equipped. 2) Take the vehicle to a safe place and park. 3) Let the engine run at the normal idle speed for a few minutes until the high engine coolant temperature warning light goes off. WARNING If you see or hear escaping steam, stop the vehicle in a safe place and immediately turn off the engine to cool it. Do not open the hood when steam is present. When the steam can no longer be seen or heard, open the hood to see if the coolant is still boiling. If it is, you must wait until it stops boiling before you proceed. If the high engine coolant temperature warning light does not go off: 1) Turn off the engine and check that the water pump belt and pulleys are not damaged or slipping. If any abnormality is found, correct it. 2) Check the coolant level in the reservoir. If it is found to be lower than “LOW” line, check radiator, water pump, radiator hoses and heater hoses for leakage. 7-10 81RM0-74E EMERGENCY SERVICE If leakage that may cause overheating is found, do not run the engine until these problems have been corrected. 3) If leakage is not found, carefully add coolant to the reservoir and then the radiator, if necessary. (Refer to “Engine coolant” in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.) NOTE: If engine overheats and you are not sure what to do, contact a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. EXAMPLE WARNING • It is hazardous to remove the radiator cap when the water temperature is high, because scalding fluid and steam may be blown out under pressure. The cap should only be taken off when the coolant temperature has lowered. • To help prevent personal injury, keep hands, tools and clothing away from the engine cooling fan and air-conditioner fan (if equipped). These electric fans can automatically turn on without warning. Warning triangle EXAMPLE MH007001 In case of vehicle break-down or during emergency stopping, where, your vehicle could become a potential traffic hazard, keep the warning triangle, provided with your vehicle, on the road free from any obstacles behind your vehicle so as to warn the approaching traffic, at an approximate distance of 50-100 m. The reflecting side of the triangle should face the on coming traffic. Please activate the hazard warning lamps before alighting the vehicle to keep the warning triangle. EXAMPLE 79J007 MH007014 7-11 81RM0-74E EMERGENCY SERVICE • Remove the warning triangle carefully from the cover as shown by arrow 1. • Open both the reflector arms as shown by arrow and lock the arms with each other with the clip provided in the right arm. Open the bottom stand in counterclockwise direction as shown by arrow 3. Position the warning triangle behind the vehicle on a plain surface. • Reverse the removal procedure for keeping inside the cover. EXAMPLE MH007015 7-12 81RM0-74E APPEARANCE CARE APPEARANCE CARE Corrosion prevention .......................................................... 8-1 Vehicle cleaning .................................................................. 8-2 8 81RM08004 81RM0-74E APPEARANCE CARE Corrosion prevention It is important to take good care of your vehicle to protect it from corrosion. Listed below are instructions for how to maintain your vehicle to prevent corrosion. Please read and follow these instructions carefully. Important information about corrosion Common causes of corrosion 1) Accumulation of road salt, dirt, moisture or chemicals in hard-to-reach areas of the vehicle underbody or frame. 2) Chipping, scratches and any damage to treated or painted metal surfaces resulting from minor accidents or abrasion by stones and gravel. 3) Any or all of the below mentioned points: • Continuous exposure to sunlight • Hard water and sea water coming in contact with vehicle. • Foot rubbing (skirting). Environmental conditions which accelerate corrosion 1) Road salt, dust control chemicals, sea air or industrial pollution will all accelerate the corrosion of metal. 2) High humidity will increase the rate of corrosion particularly when the temperature range is just above the freezing point. 3) Moisture in certain areas of a vehicle for an extended period of time may pro- mote corrosion even though other body sections may be completely dry. 4) High temperatures will cause an accelerated rate of corrosion to parts of the vehicle which are not well-ventilated to permit quick drying. This information illustrates the necessity of keeping your vehicle (particularly the underbody) as clean and dry as possible. It is equally important to repair any damage to the paint or protective coatings as soon as possible. How to help prevent corrosion Wash your vehicle frequently The best way to preserve the finish on your vehicle and to help avoid corrosion is to keep it clean with frequent washing. Wash your vehicle at least once during the winter and once immediately after the winter. Keep your vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean and dry as possible. If you frequently drive on salted roads, your vehicle should be washed at least once a month during the winter. If you live near the ocean, your vehicle should be washed at least once a month throughout the year. For washing instructions, refer to “Vehicle cleaning” section. Remove foreign material deposits Foreign material such as salts, chemicals, road oil or tar, tree sap, bird droppings and industrial fall-out may damage the finish of your vehicle if it is left on painted surfaces. Remove these types of deposits as quickly as possible. If these deposits are difficult to wash off, an additional cleaner may be required. Check that any cleaner you use is not harmful to painted surfaces and is specifically intended for your purposes. Follow the manufacturer’s directions when using these special cleaners. Repair finish damage Carefully examine your vehicle for damage to the painted surfaces. Should you find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone through to the bare metal, have a qualified body shop make the repair. Keep passenger and luggage compartments clean Moisture, dirt or mud can accumulate under the floor mats and may cause corrosion. Occasionally, check under these mats to ensure that this area is clean and dry. More frequent checks are necessary if the vehicle is used for off-road driving or in wet weather. Certain cargos such as chemicals, fertilizers, cleaners, salts, etc. are extremely corrosive by nature. These products should be transported in sealed containers. If they 8-1 69RH0-74E APPEARANCE CARE are spilled or leaked, clean and dry the area immediately. Park your vehicle in a dry, well-ventilated area Park your vehicle to save it from continuous exposure to direct sunlight. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorlyventilated area. If you often wash your vehicle in the garage and place it there in wet condition, your garage may be damp. The high humidity in the garage may cause or accelerate corrosion. A wet vehicle may corrode even in a heated garage if the ventilation is poor. Vehicle cleaning • Clean out any dirt, sand, etc. using a vacuum cleaner, or wipe off the surfaces using a soft cloth moistened with cold or lukewarm water. If the interior is left dirty, scratches can occur. • Quickly clean off any liquids such as those from air fresheners or spilled beverages by using tissue paper or a soft cloth. Leaving spilled liquids can cause staining, discoloration or cracking. EXAMPLE WARNING WARNING Do not apply additional undercoating or rust preventive coating on or around exhaust system components such as the catalytic converter and exhaust pipes. A fire could be started if the undercoating substance becomes overheated. Cleaning interior 81RM08001 WARNING When cleaning the interior or exterior of the vehicle, do not use flammable solvents such as lacquer thinners, petrol and benzene. Also, do not use cleaning materials such as bleaches and strong household detergents. The materials could cause personal injury or damage to the vehicle. • Do not spray the interior with water or other liquids. If the navigation equipment, audio components, switches, wiring under the floor, or other electrical parts become wet, there is a risk of fire or malfunction, and the SRS airbag system could fail to function normally. If you pour water or spill a drink in the vehicle, consult a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. 8-2 69RH0-74E APPEARANCE CARE NOTICE • Do not use chemical products containing the following ingredients. Doing so may cause staining, discoloration, deformation, or a deterioration in strength, etc. – Solvents such as benzine, gasoline, thinner, or sticker peeling agents – Acidic or alkaline detergents – Bleaches or dyes • Do not use chemical products that include silicone for cleaning the areas around the air conditioner, electronic equipment such as the audio or navigation systems or switches. Contact with silicone may cause them to malfunction. • Do not leave colored leather goods, furs, vinyl articles, etc. in your vehicle for long periods. Doing so could cause discoloration or deformation of the interior. Vinyl upholstery Prepare a solution of soap or mild detergent mixed with warm water. Apply the solution to the vinyl with a sponge or soft cloth and let it soak for a few minutes to loosen dirt. Rub the surface with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt and the soap solution. If some dirt still remains on the surface, repeat this procedure. Fabric upholstery (Except front passenger seat) Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soap solution, rub stained areas with a clean damp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areas again with a cloth dampened with water. Repeat this until the stain is removed, or use a commercial fabric cleaner for tougher stains. If you use a fabric cleaner, carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and precautions. Leather upholstery Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soap or saddle soap solution, wipe dirt off with a clean damp soft cloth. To remove soap, wipe the areas again with a soft cloth dampened with water. Wipe the areas dry with a soft dry cloth. Repeat this until the dirt or stain is removed, or use a commercial leather cleaner for tougher dirt or stains. If you use a leather cleaner, carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and precautions. Do not use solvent type cleaners or abrasive cleaners. CAUTION • Do not spill liquid or semi-solid on the front passenger's seat. If you spill it on the front passenger's seat, immediately wipe it dry with a soft cloth. Contact of liquid with sensor may impact the function of seat belt reminder sensor. • Do not place any sharp or heavy object on passenger seat which can penetrate through seat upholstery and can cause damage to sensor. Fabric upholstery (For front passenger seat) Do not use liquid for cleaning as it may penetrate the fabric and damage the seat sensor. 8-3 69RH0-74E APPEARANCE CARE NOTE: • In order to keep leather upholstery looking good, it should be cleaned at least twice a year. • If leather upholstery becomes wet, immediately wipe it dry with tissue paper or a soft cloth. Water may cause leather to harden and shrink if it is not wiped off. • When parking on sunny days, select a shady place or use a sunshade. If leather upholstery is exposed to direct sunlight for a long time, it may discolor and shrink. • As is common with natural materials, leather is inherently irregular in grain and cowhide has spots in its natural state. These do not affect the performance of the leather in any way. Seat belts Clean seat belts with a mild soap and water. Do not use bleach or dye on the belts. They may weaken the fabric in the belts. CAUTION • Do not spill liquid or semi-solid on the front passenger's seat. If you spill it on the front passenger's seat, immediately wipe it dry with a soft cloth. Contact of liquid with sensor may impact the function of seat belt reminder sensor. • Do not place any sharp or heavy object on passenger seat which can penetrate through seat upholstery and can cause damage to sensor. Vinyl floor mats Ordinary dirt can be removed from vinyl with water or mild soap. Use a brush to help loosen dirt. After the dirt is loosened, rinse the mat thoroughly with water and dry it in the shade. Carpets Remove dirt and soil as much as possible with a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soap solution, rub stained areas with a clean damp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areas again with a cloth dampened with water. Repeat this until the stain is removed, or use a commercial carpet cleaner for tougher stains. If you use a carpet cleaner, carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and precautions. Instrument panel and console Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Gently wipe dirt off with a tightly squeezed damp clean cloth. Repeat this until the dirt is removed. NOTICE • Do not use chemical products that contain silicon to wipe electrical components such as the air conditioning system, audio, navigation system, or other switches. These will cause damage to the components. • Do not spray water or any liquid directly on instrument cluster or any other electrical or electronic components. This may cause damage and/or lead to non-functioning of the part. EXAMPLE 81RM08005 8-4 69RH0-74E APPEARANCE CARE Cleaning exterior NOTICE • Liquid such as liquid aromatics, soft drinks or juice may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Immediately wipe it dry with tissue paper or a soft cloth. • Do not leave leather products with color, fur or vinyl products, etc. in your vehicle for long periods. It may cause discoloration or deterioration of interior. NOTICE It is important that your vehicle be kept clean and free from dirt. Failure to keep your vehicle clean may result in fading of the paint or corrosion to various parts of the vehicle body. Caring for aluminum wheels NOTE: • Do not use an acidic or alkaline detergent, or a cleaner containing petroleum solvent to wash aluminum wheels. These types of cleaner will cause permanent spots, discoloration and cracks on finished surfaces and damage to center caps. • Do not use a bristle brush and soap containing an abrasive material. These will damage finished surfaces. Washing WARNING • Never attempt to wash and wax your vehicle with the engine running. • When cleaning the underside of the body and fender, where there may be sharp-edged parts, wear gloves and a long-sleeved shirt to protect your hands and arms from being cut. • After washing your vehicle, carefully test the brakes before driving to check that they have maintained their normal effectiveness. Washing by hand EXAMPLE 81RM08002 8-5 69RH0-74E APPEARANCE CARE When washing the vehicle, park it in the place where direct sunlight does not fall on it and follow the instructions below: 1) Flush the underside of body and wheel housings with pressurized water to remove mud and debris. Use plenty of water. 2) Rinse the body to loosen the dirt. Remove dirt and mud from the body exterior with running water. You may use a soft sponge or brush. Do not use hard materials which can scratch the paint or plastic. Remember that the headlight covers or lenses are made of plastic in many cases. NOTICE NOTICE When washing the vehicle: • Avoid directing steam or hot water of more than 80°C (176°F) on plastic parts. • To avoid damaging engine components, do not use pressurized water in the engine compartment. To avoid damage to the paint or plastic surface, do not wipe the dirt off without ample water. Follow the above procedure. EXAMPLE 3) Wash the entire exterior with a mild detergent or car wash soap using a sponge or soft cloth. The sponge or cloth should be frequently soaked in the soap solution. NOTICE 6) Check carefully for damage to painted surfaces. If there is any damage, touch up the damage following the procedure below: 1. Clean all damaged spots and allow them to dry. 2. Stir the paint and touch up the damaged spots lightly using a small brush. 3. Allow the paint to dry completely. Washing by an automatic car wash NOTICE • If you use an automatic car wash, check that your vehicle’s body parts, such as spoilers, cannot be damaged. If you are in doubt, consult the car wash operator for advice. • Remove the antenna when using an automatic car wash. When using a commercial car wash product, observe the cautions specified by the manufacturer. Never use strong household detergents or soaps. 81RM08006 4) Once the dirt has been completely removed, rinse off the detergent with running water. 5) Wipe off the vehicle body with a wet chamois or cloth and allow it to dry in the shade. 8-6 69RH0-74E APPEARANCE CARE Washing by a high-pressure cleaner NOTICE If you use a high-pressure cleaner, keep away the nozzle from your vehicle sufficiently. • Bringing the nozzle to your vehicle too close or pointing the nozzle to the opening of front grill or bumper etc. can cause damage and malfunction of the vehicle body and parts. • Pointing the nozzle to the weatherstrip of door glasses and doors can allow water to enter the cabin. Waxing EXAMPLE 81RM08003 After washing the vehicle, waxing and polishing are recommended to further protect and beautify the paint. • Only use waxes and polishes of good quality. • When using waxes and polishes, observe the precautions specified by the manufacturers. NOTE: Do not use wax on plastic parts that are not coated.Waxing these surfaces could result in a whitened or uneven appearance. 8-7 69RH0-74E SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS Vehicle identification .......................................................... 9-1 FASTag (if equipped) ........................................................... 9-2 High Security Registration Plate (HSRP) (if applicable) ........................................................................9-3 Fuel ....................................................................................... 9-4 Specifications ...................................................................... 9-5 84MM01001 9 81RM0-74E SPECIFICATIONS Vehicle identification Chassis serial number EXAMPLE The chassis and/or engine serial numbers are used to register the vehicle. They are also used to assist a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop when ordering or referring to special service information. Whenever you have occasion to consult a Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop, remember to identify your vehicle with this number. Should you find the number difficult to read, you will also find it on the identification plate. Engine serial number EXAMPLE 60G128 81RM09001 The engine serial number is stamped on the cylinder block as shown in the illustration. EXAMPLE 81RM09002 9-1 81RM0-74E SPECIFICATIONS FASTag (if equipped) As seen from inside of the vehicle As per Ministry of Road Transport and Highways, the FASTag (1) is mandatory for each vehicle for the purpose of electronic toll collection or any other purpose as may be defined by the Government of India. In case of any damage to FASTag or replacement of front windscreen, please contact your nearest Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop. EXAMPLE EXAMPLE As seen from outside of the vehicle EXAMPLE Easy to Cruise ! Please do not peel off the tag, as it would permanently damage the tag xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 4 (1) 81RM09003 64MM01002 64MM01003 NOTE: The picture shown is for indicative purpose only. Internal structure of actual device mounted on vehicle may be different. NOTE: The picture shown is for indicative purpose only. Internal structure of actual device mounted on vehicle may be different. NOTE: • Any attempt to remove the tag from the windscreen will result in permanent damage to the tag. • Use of chemical cleaners to clean the windscreen area where the tag is mounted can damage the tag. • Use of any sharp objects on the tag can damage the tag. 9-2 81RM0-74E SPECIFICATIONS High Security Registration Plate (HSRP) (if applicable) As per Ministry of Road Transport and Highways, every new vehicle must have HSRP. HSRP contains; • Front and rear HSRP, which will be fitted with 2 snap-locks each on number plate area. • Third license plate on front windshield. Third License Plate EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (a) (f) (b) (c) (e) F : XXXXXXXX - (d) R : XXXXXXXX 72RM09002 (1) (a) HSRP issuing authority name (b) Vehicle registration number (c) Unique laser number - Front plate (d) Unique laser number - Rear plate (e) Date of 1st registration (in DD-MM-YYYY format) (f) Green strip (BS6 vehicle) 81RM09004 (1) Third license plate Third license plate - As seen from outside of the vehicle NOTE: The picture shown is for indicative purpose only. Internal structure of actual label mounted on vehicle may be different. NOTE: • Any attempt to remove the third license plate from the windscreen will result in permanent damage to the label. • Use of chemical cleaners to clean the windscreen area where the label is mounted can damage the same. • Use of any sharp objects on the label can damage the label. • In the event of any replacement of the third license plate, may please contact the approved authority. Third license plate - As seen from inside of the vehicle EXAMPLE Notice It is unlawful for any person to duplicate, alter, change, deface, destroy, multilate, remove, tear down this Third Registration Plate Sticker, except if done by authority of law. Do not wipe with harsh abrasive materials, detergents, etc. as it may deface or damage this Sticker. 64MM01009 NOTE: The picture shown is for indicative purpose only. NOTE: Color of third license plate (back) is as per HSRP regulation as defined by Ministry of Road Transport and highways. 9-3 81RM0-74E SPECIFICATIONS Fuel Petrol engine To avoid damaging the catalytic converter, you must use unleaded petrol with an octane number (RON) of 91 or higher. Petrol/Ethanol blends Blends of unleaded petrol and ethanol (grain alcohol), also known as gasohol, are commercially available in certain areas. Blends of this type may be used in your vehicle if they are no more than 10% ethanol. Make sure this petrol-ethanol blend has octane ratings no lower than those recommended for the petrol. NOTE: If you are not satisfied with the driveability or fuel economy of your vehicle when you are using a petrol/alcohol blend, you should switch back to unleaded petrol containing no alcohol. Petrol containing MTBE Unleaded petrol containing MTBE (methyl tertiary butyl ether) may be used in your vehicle if the MTBE content is not greater than 15%. This oxygenated fuel does not contain alcohol. NOTICE • The fuel tank has an air space to allow for fuel expansion in hot weather. If you continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically shut off or an initial blowback occurs, the air chamber will become full. Exposure to heat when fully fuelled in this manner will result in leakage due to fuel expansion. To prevent such fuel leakage, stop filling after the filler nozzle has automatically shut off, or when initial vent blowback occurs, if using an alternative nonautomatic system. • Be careful not to spill fuel containing alcohol while refueling. If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, wipe it up immediately. Fuels containing alcohol can cause paint damage, which is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. CAUTION Use of spurious, low quality, adulterated fuel can cause damage to the engine & engine auxilliaries, affect functioning of engine and degrade engine performance including but not limited to engine seizure. 9-4 81RM0-74E SPECIFICATIONS Specifications NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice. M/T: Manual transmission ITEM: Dimensions Overall length Overall width Overall height Wheelbase UNIT: mm Front Track Rear ITEM: Mass (weight) Curb mass (weight) UNIT: kg M/T Auto Gear Shift Gross vehicle mass (weight) rating Permissible maximum axle weight R14 R15 R14 R15 3695 1655 1555 2435 1430 1440 1440 1450 K10C engine model 800 – 820 815-825 1260 Front 680 Rear 710 9-5 81RM0-74E SPECIFICATIONS ITEM: Engine Type K10C (DOHC) Number of cylinders 3 Bore 73.0 mm (2.87 in.) Stroke 79.5 mm (3.13 in.) 998 cm3 (998 cc, 60.9 cu.in) Piston displacement Compression ratio 11.5: 1 ITEM: Electrical Standard spark plug NGK ILZKR6F11 Battery ISS M42*1 Fuses See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section. *1: Your vehicle is equipped with a lead-acid battery for exclusive use of the ENG A-STOP system. When replacing the lead-acid battery, make sure to select the specified type for ENG A-STOP system. Consult an authorized Maruti Suzuki authorized dealer for replacing the lead-acid battery. 9-6 81RM0-74E SPECIFICATIONS ITEM: Lights WATTAGE BULB No. Headlight 12V 60/55W H4 Front fog light (if equipped) 12V 19W H16 Position light 12V 5W W5W 12V 21W PY21W Turn signal light Side turn signal light Front Rear 12V 21W PY21W (on fender) 12V 5W W5W (on outside rearview mirror) Tail/brake light LED – 12V 21/5W P21/5W High-mount stop light 12V 16W W16W Reversing light 12V 21W P21W License plate light 12V 5W W5W Interior light 12V 10W C10W ITEM: Wheels and tires Tire size (front, rear and spare*2) 165/70R14 81S*1, 175/60 R15 81H*1 Rim size 165/70R14 tire: 14 x 5J*3 175/60R15 tire: 15 x 5J*3 Tire pressures For the specified tire pressure, see the tire information label located on the driver’s door lock pillar. *1: When tire replacement is necessary and if the specified load index and speed rated tire is not available, then use a tire of higher load index and speed rating. *2: The spare wheel provided with alloy wheel variant is steel wheel rim, hence follow 4 tire rotation only. (Refer: under section “Inspection and maintenance”) *3: If applicable: The provision of different spare wheel is as per government notification/regulation (MORTH notification vide GSR 625 (E)). 9-7 81RM0-74E SPECIFICATIONS ITEM: Recommended fuel / lubricants and capacities (approx.) Fuel See “Fuel” in this section. 32 L# Engine oil Classification: API SN Viscosity: SAE 0W-16 2.8 L (replacement with oil filter) Engine coolant See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section. 3.7 L (including reservoir tank) Manual transmission oil/ Auto Gear Shift oil “MARUTI GENUINE GEAR OIL 75W” 1.5 L Brake fluid MARUTI GENUINE BRAKE FLUID (MGBF) or SAE J1703 or DOT 3 Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section. # The fuel tank capacity is slightly more than the recommended quantity of fuel that you can fill. The additional voluminous space is provided for safety and scientific reasons. 9-8 81RM0-74E SPECIFICATIONS MEMO 9-9 81RM0-74E